EOS 70D (W) EOS 70D (N)
EOS 70D (W)
EOS 70D (N)
ENGLISH
The EOS 70D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi functions explained in
this manual.
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Introduction
The EOS 70D (W/N) is a high-performance, digital single-lens reflex
camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 20.2 effective
megapixels, DIGIC 5+, high-precision and high-speed 19-point AF (all
cross-type focusing), approx. 7.0 fps continuous shooting, Live View
shooting, Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting, and Wi-Fi
function*.
The camera is highly responsive to any shooting situation at any time,
provides many features for demanding shots, and expands shooting
possibilities with various system accessories.
* The EOS 70D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi function.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
With a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have
captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how
they come out. You can then better understand the camera.
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Warnings” (p.445-447) and “Handling Precautions” (p.18-19).
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that
certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
2
Compatible Cards
The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity:
• SD memory cards
• SDHC memory cards*
• SDXC memory cards*
* UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a fast reading/
writing speed as shown in the table.
Compression Method (p.265)
Card
IPB
6 MB/sec. or faster
ALL-I (I-only)
20 MB/sec. or faster
If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need
an even faster card.
To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
3
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items have been included
with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Battery Pack
LP-E6
(with protective cover)
Camera
(with body cap)
Wide Strap
EW-EOS70D
Battery Charger
LC-E6/LC-E6E*
Interface Cable
* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a
power cord.)
The Instruction Manuals and DVD/CD-ROMs provided are listed on the next
page.
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
Depending on the Lens Kit type, a lens instruction manual may also be
included.
Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
4
Instruction Manuals and DVD/CD-ROMs
The instruction manual consists of booklets and electronic manuals
(PDF files on the DVD-ROM). Basic operations are explained in the
booklets. For detailed instructions on all functions and operations,
see the detailed version manuals on the DVD-ROM.
Basic Instruction
Manual
Wi-Fi Function
Instruction Manual*
(Basic)
Wi-Fi Cautions*
* Not provided with the EOS 70D (N).
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
Contains the following manuals in PDF:
• Instruction Manual (Detailed version)
• Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual (Detailed version)
• Software Instruction Manuals
Instructions for viewing the Instruction Manuals PDFs on the
DVD-ROM are on pages 453-454.
EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM)
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Contains various software. For outlines and installation
procedure of the software, see pages 457-459.
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
5
Quick Start Guide
Insert the battery (p.30).
1
To charge the battery, see page 28.
Insert a card (p.31).
2
3
With the card’s label facing
toward the back of the
camera, insert it into the card
slot.
White index
Red index
Attach the lens (p.40).
Align the lens’ white or red mount
index with the camera’s mount
index of the same color.
4
Set the lens focus mode switch
to <f> (p.40).
5
Set the power switch to <1>,
then set the Mode Dial to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.72).
Turn the Mode Dial while holding down
the lock release button at the center.
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
6
Quick Start Guide
6
Flip out the LCD monitor (p.34).
7
Focus the subject (p.45).
8
Take the picture (p.45).
9
Review the picture (p.60).
When the LCD monitor displays the
date/time/zone setting screens, see
page 37.
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The camera will focus the subject.
If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised.
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
The captured image will be
displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.290).
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.215).
To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.290).
To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.322).
7
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
<5>
<9> <V> <U>
<0>
0, 9, 7, 8
: Indicates the Main Dial.
: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
: Indicates the Multi-controller and the push
direction.
: Indicates the Setting button.
: Indicates that the corresponding function
remains active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16
sec. respectively after you let go of the button.
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button and changing the setting.
M
: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that
the function is available only in the Creative Zone modes
(p.24).
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Problem-solving advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set down (Multi function
lock released) (p.35, 48).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.
8
Chapters
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s
basic operations and shooting procedures.
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2
Getting Started
27
Basic Shooting
71
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
99
Image Settings
115
Advanced Operations
157
Flash Photography
187
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
215
Shooting Movies
251
Image Playback
289
Post-Processing Images
327
Sensor Cleaning
339
Printing Images
345
Customizing the Camera
361
Reference
393
Viewing the DVD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
451
9
Contents
Introduction
2
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 3
Item Check List................................................................................. 4
Instruction Manual and DVD/CD-ROMs ........................................... 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Index to Features ........................................................................... 16
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 18
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 20
1
Getting Started
27
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 28
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 30
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 31
Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 34
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 35
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone .................................................. 37
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 39
Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 40
Lens Image Stabilizer..................................................................... 43
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 44
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 50
3 Menu Operations .................................................................. 52
d Using the Touch Screen............................................................. 54
Before You Start............................................................................. 57
Formatting the Card..................................................................... 57
Disabling the Beeper ................................................................... 59
Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ................................. 59
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................... 60
Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On .................................................. 60
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings ............................. 61
Displaying the Grid ......................................................................... 64
Q Displaying the Electronic Level............................................... 65
Feature Guide and Help ................................................................. 69
10
Contents
2
Basic Shooting
71
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................72
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) ......................... 75
7 Disabling Flash ......................................................................... 77
C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................78
8: Special Scene Mode .............................................................81
2 Shooting Portraits ...................................................................... 82
3 Shooting Landscapes ............................................................... 83
4 Shooting Close-ups....................................................................84
5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................ 85
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................86
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)............................................87
G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................ 88
Q Quick Control............................................................................. 90
Shoot by Ambience Selection .........................................................92
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type.................................................... 96
3
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
99
f: Selecting the AF Operation ................................................... 100
S Selecting the AF Area............................................................. 103
AF Area Selection Modes ............................................................. 106
When Autofocus Fails ................................................................... 109
MF: Manual Focus .....................................................................110
i Selecting the Drive Mode........................................................111
j Using the Self-timer ................................................................. 113
4
Image Settings
115
Setting the Image-Recording Quality ............................................ 116
i: Setting the ISO Speed .......................................................... 120
A Selecting a Picture Style.......................................................126
A Customizing a Picture Style .................................................. 129
A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 132
11
Contents
Setting the White Balance ............................................................ 134
O Custom White Balance........................................................ 135
P Setting the Color Temperature ............................................ 137
White Balance Correction............................................................. 138
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast................................. 140
Setting Noise Reduction............................................................... 141
Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 145
Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction .. 146
Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 149
File Numbering Methods .............................................................. 151
Setting Copyright Information....................................................... 153
Setting the Color Space ............................................................... 155
5
Advanced Operations
157
d: Program AE ............................................................................ 158
s: Shutter-Priority AE................................................................ 160
f: Aperture-Priority AE ............................................................. 162
Depth-of-Field Preview .............................................................. 163
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 164
q Selecting the Metering Mode.................................................. 165
Setting Exposure Compensation .................................................. 167
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)........................................... 168
A AE Lock................................................................................... 170
F: Bulb Exposures....................................................................... 171
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting .............................. 172
P Multiple Exposures ................................................................. 175
2 Mirror Lockup ........................................................................ 182
Using the Eyepiece Cover............................................................ 183
F Using a Remote Switch ............................................................ 184
R Remote Control Shooting .......................................................... 184
12
Contents
6
Flash Photography
187
D Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................. 188
D Using an External Speedlite...................................................... 193
Setting the Flash ........................................................................... 195
Using Wireless Flash .................................................................... 203
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 215
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ............................................... 216
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................222
U Shooting with Filter Effects...................................................... 224
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 228
Using AF to Focus (AF Method) ................................................... 233
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter .............................................245
MF: Focusing Manually................................................................. 247
8
Shooting Movies
251
k Shooting Movies .....................................................................252
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................263
Setting the Movie Recording Size.................................................265
Using Movie Digital Zoom ............................................................. 267
Setting the Sound Recording ........................................................268
Setting the Time Code ..................................................................270
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 273
Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................ 277
9
Image Playback
289
x Image Playback ......................................................................290
B: Shooting Information Display.............................................292
H I Searching for Images Quickly............................................ 296
u/y Magnified View ................................................................... 298
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen ........................................ 299
b Rotating the Image ..................................................................301
13
Contents
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 302
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 304
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 306
k Playing Movies ....................................................................... 308
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 310
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 312
Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 316
K Protecting Images................................................................... 320
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 322
Changing Image Playback Settings ............................................. 324
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness....................................... 324
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ............................................... 325
10
Post-Processing Images
327
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera .......................... 328
S Resizing JPEG Images........................................................... 333
U Applying Creative Filters......................................................... 335
11
Sensor Cleaning
339
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning .................................................. 340
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................ 341
Manual Sensor Cleaning .............................................................. 343
12
Printing Images
345
Preparing to Print ......................................................................... 346
w Printing ................................................................................... 348
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 355
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images ................................. 358
p Specifying Images for a Photobook ......................................... 359
13
Customizing the Camera
361
Setting Custom Functions ............................................................ 362
Custom Functions ........................................................................ 363
14
Contents
Custom Function Settings............................................................. 365
C.Fn I: Exposure ........................................................................ 365
C.Fn II: Autofocus ......................................................................368
C.Fn III: Operation/Others .......................................................... 375
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus ................................. 377
8: Custom Controls .................................................................... 383
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 389
w: Register Custom Shooting Modes........................................... 390
14
Reference
393
B Button Functions................................................................. 394
Checking the Battery Information.................................................. 396
Using a Household Power Outlet.................................................. 400
H Using Eye-Fi Cards ................................................................. 401
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode .............. 404
Menu Settings ............................................................................... 408
System Map .................................................................................. 416
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................418
Error Codes...................................................................................432
Specifications................................................................................433
Handling Precautions: EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM,
EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM ................................................443
Safety Warnings............................................................................445
15
Viewing the DVD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
451
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM) ...452
Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................455
About the Software ....................................................................... 457
Installing the Software................................................................... 458
Index ............................................................................................. 460
15
Index to Features
Power
Charging the battery
Battery check
Battery information check
Household power outlet
Auto power off
Card
Formatting
Release shutter
without card
Lens
Attaching/Detaching
Zoom
Image Stabilizer
Basic Settings
Language
Date/Time/Zone
Beeper
Copyright information
Clear all camera settings
Viewfinder
Dioptric adjustment
Eyepiece cover
Electronic level
(During shooting)
Electronic level
(Before shooting)
LCD Monitor
Brightness adjustment
Touch screen
Electronic level
Feature guide
Help
AF
AF operation
16
Î p.28
Î p.36
Î p.396
Î p.400
Î p.59
Î p.57
Î p.32
AF area selection mode
AF point selection
AF Microadjustment
Manual focusing
Metering
Metering mode
Drive
Drive mode
Self-timer
Maximum burst
Î p.40
Î p.41
Î p.43
Recording Images
Î p.39
Î p.37
Î p.59
Î p.153
Î p.61
Image Quality
Î p.44
Î p.183
Î p.66
Î p.67
Î p.324
Î p.54
Î p.65
Î p.69
Î p.70
Î p.100
Creating/Selecting
a folder
File numbering
Image-recording quality
ISO speed
Picture Style
White balance
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Noise reduction for high
ISO speeds
Noise reduction for long
exposures
Highlight tone priority
Peripheral illumination
correction
Chromatic aberration
correction
Color space
Shooting
Shooting mode
HDR
Multiple exposures
Mirror lockup
Depth-of-field preview
Î p.103
Î p.105
Î p.377
Î p.110
Î p.165
Î p.111
Î p.113
Î p.119
Î p.149
Î p.151
Î p.116
Î p.120
Î p.126
Î p.134
Î p.140
Î p.141
Î p.143
Î p.145
Î p.146
Î p.147
Î p.155
Î p.24
Î p.172
Î p.175
Î p.182
Î p.163
Index to Features
Remote control
Quick Control
Exposure Adjustment
Exposure compensation
AEB
AE lock
Safety shift
Flash
Built-in flash
External flash
Flash function settings
Wireless shooting
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting
Focusing
Continuous AF
Aspect ratio
Creative filters
Touch Shutter
Movie Shooting
Movie shooting
Movie Servo AF
Movie recording size
Digital zoom
Sound recording
Time code
Still photo shooting
Video snapshot
Playback
Image review time
Single-image display
Shooting information
display
Index display
Image browsing
(Jump display)
Î p.184
Î p.50
Î p.167
Î p.168
Î p.170
Î p.367
Î p.188
Î p.193
Î p.195
Î p.203
Î p.215
Î p.233
Î p.228
Î p.229
Î p.224
Î p.245
Î p.251
Î p.273
Î p.265
Î p.267
Î p.268
Î p.270
Î p.261
Î p.277
Î p.60
Î p.290
Î p.292
Î p.296
Î p.297
Magnified view
Image rotate
Rating
Movie playback
Slide show
Viewing images on a
TV set
Protect
Erase
Touch playback
Î p.298
Î p.301
Î p.302
Î p.308
Î p.312
Î p.316
Î p.320
Î p.322
Î p.299
Image Editing
RAW image processing Î p.328
Resize
Î p.333
Creative filters
Î p.335
Printing
PictBridge
Print Order (DPOF)
Photobook Set-up
Î p.345
Î p.355
Î p.359
Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn) Î p.362
Custom Controls
Î p.383
My Menu
Î p.389
Custom shooting mode Î p.390
Sensor Cleaning and Dust
Reduction
Sensor cleaning
Î p.340
Append Dust Delete Data Î p.341
Software
Overview
Installation
Wi-Fi*
Wi-Fi
Î p.457
Î p.458
Î Separate booklet
* The EOS 70D (N) does not have the
Wi-Fi function.
17
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon
Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
misoperation.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
18
Handling Precautions
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure
it is working properly.
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a case.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the
lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
19
Nomenclature
LCD panel (p.22)
<R> Drive mode selection button (p.111)
<f> AF mode selection button (p.100)
<i> ISO speed
setting button (p.120)
EF lens mount index (p.40)
<q> Metering mode
selection button (p.165)
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam
(p.188/203)
<B> AF area
selection mode button
(p.104)
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe (p.193)
<D> Flash button (p.188)
<6> Main Dial
(p.46)
Microphone (p.269)
<U> LCD panel
illumination button
(p.49)
Mode Dial lock-release
button (p.46)
Mode Dial (p.24)
Shutter button
(p.45)
Strap mount
(p.27)
Red-eye
reduction/
Self-timer lamp
(p.190/113)
Speaker
(p.308)
Remote control
sensor (p.184)
Lens release
button (p.41)
Grip
(Battery
compartment)
DC coupler cord hole
(p.400)
Lens lock pin
Depth-of-field preview button
(p.163)
Lens mount
Mirror (p.182, 343)
Contacts (p.19)
<Y> External microphone IN terminal (p.269)
<F> Remote control terminal (p.184)
<D>
HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.316)
Body cap (p.40)
20
<q/C>
Audio/video OUT/Digital terminal
(p.319/346, 455)
Nomenclature
<V> Focal plane mark
<p> AF start button
(p.45, 100, 217, 259)
<A/k> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch (p.215/251)
<0> Start/Stop button (p.216, 252)
<A> AE lock/FE lock button/
<y> Index/Reduce button
(p.170, 192/296, 298)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.44)
Eyecup (p.183)
<S> AF point selection/
<u> Magnify button
(p.105/298)
Viewfinder eyepiece
Access lamp (p.33)
Power switch (p.35)
Strap mount
(p.27)
<M> Menu
button (p.52)
<B>
Info button
(p.49, 65, 70,
218, 258, 290,
394)
Card slot
cover (p.31)
Battery
compartment
cover release
lever (p.30)
LCD monitor (p.52, 324)
Tripod socket
Battery compartment
cover (p.30)
<Q> Quick Control button (p.50)
<5> Quick Control Dial (p.47)
<x> Playback button (p.290)
<9> <V> <U> Multi-controller (p.48)
Multi function lock switch (p.48)
<0> Setting button (p.52)
<L> Erase button (p.322)
Card slot (p.31)
21
Nomenclature
LCD panel
Drive mode (p.111)
u Single shooting
o High-speed continuous shooting
i Low-speed continuous shooting
B Silent single shooting
M Silent continuous shooting
Q Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
k Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.145)
<g> ISO speed (p.120)
ISO speed (p.120)
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time
Error number/Error code (Err)
Remaining images to record
AF operation (p.100)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
4L
Manual focus
Metering mode (p.165)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted
average metering
<M>
Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
(p.141)
Wi-Fi function*
<k/l>
12
<w>
HDR shooting
(p.172)
<P> Multiple-exposure
shooting (p.175)
Shutter speed
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Error code (Err)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
Battery check (p.36)
<h> AEB (p.168)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
(p.167)
AEB range (p.168)
Aperture
AF point selection
([ -- -- -- ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
* The EOS 70D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi function (Not Displayed).
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
22
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Spot metering circle (p.165)
Single-point AF (Manual selection)
(p.103)
Zone AF points (p.103)
Zone AF (Manual zone selection) (p.103)
19-point automatic selection AF (p.103)
AF points (p.103)
Focusing screen
Grid (p.64)
Electronic level
(p.66)
Warning symbol
(p.376)
<z>
Battery check
(p.36)
<g> ISO speed
(p.120)
<o> Focus confirmation
light (p.73)
<A> AE lock (p.170) /
AEB in-progress
(p.168)
<D> Flash-ready
(p.188, 193)
Improper FE lock
warning
<d> FE lock (p.192) /
FEB in-progress (p.201)
<e> High-speed sync (p.200)
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.190, 193)
Shutter speed (p.160)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card/card error warning (Card)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Error code (Err)
Max. burst (p.119)
Number of remaining
multiple exposures (p.177)
ISO speed (p.120)
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.145)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.167)
AEB range (p.168)
Red-eye reduction lamp-on indicator
AF point selection
([ -- -- -- ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
Aperture (p.162)
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
23
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial
lock release button).
Creative Zone
These modes give you more
control for shooting various
subjects.
d : Program AE (p.158)
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.160)
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.162)
a : Manual exposure (p.164)
F : Bulb (p.171)
Basic Zone
Custom shooting mode
You can register the
shooting mode (d/s/
f/a/F), AF operation,
menu settings, etc., to w
and shoot (p.390).
All you do is press the shutter button.
The camera sets everything to suit
the subject or scene.
A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.72)
7 : Flash Off (p.77)
C : Creative Auto (p.78)
8 : Special scene (p.81)
2 : Portrait (p.82)
3 : Landscape (p.83)
4 : Close-up (p.84)
5 : Sports (p.85)
6 : Night Portrait (p.86)
F : Handheld Night Scene (p.87)
G : HDR Backlight Control (p.88)
24
Nomenclature
Lens
Lens without a distance scale
Focusing ring (p.110, 247)
Focus mode switch (p.40)
Hood mount (p.42)
Zoom position index
Filter thread
(front of lens)
Zoom ring (p.41)
Image Stabilizer switch (p.43)
Contacts (p.19)
Lens mount index (p.40)
25
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E6
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6 (p.28).
Power plug
Battery pack slot
Charge Lamp
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
Battery Charger LC-E6E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6 (p.28).
Power cord
Charge lamp
Battery pack slot
Power cord socket
26
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and basic camera operations.
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through
the camera’s strap mount eyelet
from the bottom. Then pass it
through the strap’s buckle as shown
in the illustration. Pull the strap to
take up any slack and make sure
the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
The eyepiece cover is also
attached to the strap (p.183).
Eyepiece cover
27
Charging the Battery
1
Remove the protective cover.
Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.
the battery.
2 Attach
As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
LC-E6
the battery.
3 Recharge
For LC-E6
As shown by the arrow, flip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.
For LC-E6E
LC-E6E
Charge Level
0-49%
50-74%
75% or higher
Fully charged
Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
X Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Color
Orange
Green
Charge Lamp
Display
Blinks once per second
Blinks twice per second
Blinks three times per second
Lights up
It takes approx. 2.5 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at room
temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time required to recharge the battery will vary greatly
depending on the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hours).
28
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.
After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
You can attach the cover in a different
orientation to indicate whether the battery
has been recharged or not.
If the battery has been recharged, attach the
cover so that the battery-shaped hole <
> is
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is
exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing
the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.396) and purchase a
new battery.
After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for approx. 10 sec.
If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.396) is 94% or higher, the battery
will not be recharged.
The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6.
29
Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E6 into the camera. The camera’s
viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and darkens
when the battery is removed.
Installing the Battery
1
Open the cover.
Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
the cover.
3 Close
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
Only Battery Pack LP-E6 can be used.
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
provided protective cover (p.28) to
the battery.
30
Installing and Removing the Card
The camera can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card (sold
separately). An UHS-I Speed Class SDHC or SDXC memory card can
also be used. The captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to
enable writing/erasing.
Installing the Card
1
Write-protect switch
Open the cover.
Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.
the card.
2 Insert
As shown by the illustration, face
the card’s label side toward you
and insert it until it clicks in place.
the cover.
3 Close
Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
When you set the power switch to
<1>, the number of possible shots
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
Possible shots
31
Installing and Removing the Card
The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.408).
Removing the Card
Access lamp
1
Open the cover.
Set the power switch to <2>.
Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
If [Recording...] is displayed, close
the cover.
the card.
2 Remove
To eject the card, gently push it in and
then let go.
Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
32
Installing and Removing the Card
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.151).
If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.57). The card
may then return to normal.
Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).
33
Using the LCD Monitor
After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live
View shooting, shoot movies, and play back images and movies. You
can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.
1
Flip out the LCD monitor.
the LCD monitor.
2 Rotate
When the LCD monitor is swung out,
180°
90°
175°
you can rotate it up or down or face it
forward toward the subject.
The indicated angles are only
approximate.
it toward you.
3 Face
Normally, face the LCD monitor
toward you.
Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor.
When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor with the screen
facing inward. This will protect the screen.
During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor
toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen.
34
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 37 to set the date/time/zone.
<1> : The camera turns on.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be executed
automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>.
You can still shoot during sensor
cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.45) to stop the
sensor cleaning and take a picture.
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
3 Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after 1
minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the
shutter button halfway (p.45).
You can set the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.59).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
card finishes recording the image.
35
Turning on the Power
z Checking the Battery Level
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon (b) indicates
that the battery will be exhausted soon.
Display
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10
9-1
0
Number of Possible Shots
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
Approx. 1300 shots
Approx. 1200 shots
50% Flash Use
Approx. 920 shots
Approx. 850 shots
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, no Live View
shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E14
• With LP-E6 x 2: approx. twice the shots without the battery grip.
• With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F):
approx. 490 shots with no flash, approx. 320 shots with 50% flash use.
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.
For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 217.
See [54: Battery info.] to check the battery’s condition in detail (p.396).
If size-AA/LR6 batteries are used in Battery Grip BG-E14, a four-level
indicator will be displayed. ([x/m] will not be displayed.)
36
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone
have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow
the steps below to set the time zone first. If you set the camera to the
correct time zone for where you currently live, when you travel to
another time zone you can simply set the camera to the correct time
zone for your destination to update the camera’s date/time
automatically.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1
Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
Under the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Time/Zone].
Press the <U> key to select the
[52] tab.
Press the <V> key to select [Date/
Time/Zone], then press <0>.
the time zone.
3 Set[London]
is set by default.
Press the <U> key to select the
time zone box.
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Press the <V> key to select the time
zone, then press <0>. (Returns to
<s>.)
The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 52-53.
In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time
difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do
not see your time zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference
with UTC.
37
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
the date and time.
4 SetPress
the <U> key to select the
number.
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Press the <V> key to set the
number, then press <0>. (Returns
to <s>.)
saving time.
5 SetSettheit ifdaylight
necessary.
Press the <U> key to select [Y].
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Press the <V> key to select [Z],
then press <0>.
When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hour.
the setting.
6 ExitPress
the <U> key to select [OK],
then press <0>.
X The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera’s battery
becomes exhausted, the date/time/zone may be reset. If this happens, set
the time zone and date/time again.
The date/time that was set will start from when you press <0> in step 6.
After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time has been
set.
38
3 Selecting the Interface Language
1
Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
Under the [52] tab, select
2 [LanguageK].
Press the <U> key to select the
[52] tab.
Press the <V> key to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.
the desired language.
3 SetPress
the <V> <U> keys to
select the language, then press
<0>.
X The interface language will change.
39
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The
camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
Align the lens’ red or white mount
White index
index with the camera’s mount index
of the same color. Turn the lens as
shown by the arrow until it clicks in
place.
Red index
the lens focus mode switch to
3 Set
<AF>.
<AF> stands for autofocus.
If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),
autofocus will not operate.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
Minimizing Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
40
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Zooming
Turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the
focus.
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrows.
Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
To owners of the EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS lens:
You can prevent the lens from extending
out while you are carrying it around. Set
the zoom ring to the 18mm wide-angle
end, then slide the zoom ring lock lever
to <LOCK>. The zoom ring can be
locked only at the wide-angle end.
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
If you purchased a lens kit with the EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
or EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, see “Handling
Precautions” on page 443.
41
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Image Conversion Factor
Since the image sensor size is
smaller than the 35mm film
format, it will look like the lens
focal length is increased by
approx. 1.6x.
Image sensor size (Approx.)
(22.5 x 15.0 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)
35mm image size
(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)
Attaching a Lens Hood
A lens hood can block unwanted light and diminish rain, snow, dust etc.
adhering to the front of the lens. Before storing the lens in a bag, etc.,
you can attach the hood in reverse.
If the Lens and the Lens Hood Have a Mount Index
1
Align the red dots on the hood
and lens edges, then turn the
hood as shown by the arrow.
the hood as shown in the
2 Turn
illustration.
Turn the hood clockwise until it
attaches securely.
If you do not attach the hood properly, it may obstruct the image’s
periphery, making it look dark.
When attaching or detaching the hood, grasp the base of the hood when
turning it. Grasping the hood’s edges when turning it may deform the
hood, resulting in failure to turn.
42
Lens Image Stabilizer
When you use the IS lens’ built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is
corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is
based on the EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.
* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.
1
Set the IS switch to <1>.
Also set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
the shutter button halfway.
2 Press
X The Image Stabilizer will operate.
the picture.
3 TakeWhen
the picture looks steady in the
viewfinder, press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
The Image Stabilizer cannot correct “subject blur”, when the subject
moves at the time of exposure.
For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <2>. If <1> is set, Image
Stabilizer misoperation may occur.
The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as
on a rocking boat.
The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to
either <AF> or <MF>.
When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to <1>
with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to
<2> is recommended.
The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a
monopod.
Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the
shooting conditions. However, the following lenses switch the IS mode
automatically:
• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM • EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
• EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
43
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.
If the knob is difficult to turn, remove
the eyecup (p.183).
If the camera dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see pages 76 and 215.
44
Basic Operation
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel (0).
Pressing completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
In Creative Zone modes, pressing the <p> button is the same as
pressing the shutter button halfway.
If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first,
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can
instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
45
Basic Operation
Mode Dial
Turn the dial while holding down
the lock release button at the
center of the dial.
6 Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
When you press a button such as <f>
<R> <i> <q>, the respective
function remains selected for the
duration of the timer (9). During this
time, you can turn the <6> dial to set
the desired setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
Use this dial to select or set the AF
operation, drive mode, ISO speed,
metering mode, AF point selection,
etc.
(2) Turn the <6> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <6> dial to set the
desired setting.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even while the <R> switch is set
upward (Multi function lock, p.48).
46
Basic Operation
5 Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
When you press a button such as <f>
<R> <i> <q>, the respective
function remains selected for the
duration of the timer (9). During this
time, you can turn the <5> dial to set
the desired setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
Use this dial to select or set the AF
operation, drive mode, ISO speed,
metering mode, AF point selection,
etc.
(2) Turn the <5> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <5> dial to set the
desired setting.
Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even while the <R> switch is set
upward (Multi function lock, p.48).
47
Basic Operation
9 Multi-controller
The Multi-controller <9> has eight keys that tilt in the directions shown
by the arrows.
Use the eight keys to select the AF
point, correct the white balance,
move the AF point or magnifying
frame during Live View shooting,
scroll around magnified images
during playback, etc.
For menus and the Quick Control, the
Multi-controller works only in the
vertical and horizontal directions
<V> <U>. It does not work in
diagonal directions.
R Multi function Lock
With [8C.Fn III-2: Multi function lock] set (p.375) and the <R>
switch set upward, it prevents the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, and
Multi-controller from moving and changing a setting inadvertently.
<R> switch set downward:
Lock released
<R> switch set upward:
Lock engaged
If the <R> switch is set upward and you try to use one of the locked
camera controls, <L> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. On the shooting function settings display (p.49), [LOCK] will be
displayed.
48
Basic Operation
U LCD Panel Illumination
Turn on (9)/off the LCD panel
illumination by pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the
shutter button completely will turn off the
LCD panel illumination.
Displaying Shooting Function Settings
After you press the <B> button a number of times, the shooting
function settings will be displayed.
With the shooting function settings displayed, you can turn the Mode
Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode (p.395).
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.50).
Press the <B> button again to turn off the display.
49
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.
1
Press the <Q> button. (7)
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired functions.
2 SetPress
the <V> <U> keys to
select a function.
X The setting of the selected function is
displayed.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting.
Basic Zone modes
Creative Zone modes
the picture.
3 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
X The captured image will be displayed.
For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting
procedure, see page 91.
In steps 1 and 2, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen
(p.54).
50
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen
Aperture (p.162)
Shutter speed (p.160)
Shooting mode*1 (p.24)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
(p.167/168)
Picture Style (p.126)
AF operation (p.100)
Return
White balance (p.134)
AF area selection mode (p.104)
White balance correction (p.138)
Drive mode (p.111)
Flash exposure compensation (p.193)
AE lock*2 (p.170)
Highlight tone priority*2 (p.145)
ISO speed (p.120)
Wi-Fi function*3
Custom Controls (p.383)
Image-recording quality
(p.116)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.140)
Metering mode (p.165)
White balance bracketing (p.139)
*1: This function cannot be set with the Quick Control screen when the
Mode Dial is set to other than <8>.
*2: These functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.
*3: Refer to the Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual.
Function Setting Screen
Ð <0>
Select the desired function and press <0>.
The function’s setting screen will appear.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial or press the
<U> key to change the settings. There are
also some functions that are set by pressing
the <B>, <B>, or <L> button.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the Quick Control screen.
When you select <
> (p.383) or
< > (p.103) and press the <M>
button, the shooting function settings
display will reappear.
51
3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the imagerecording quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use
the <M> button, <V> <U> keys, and <0> button on the
camera back.
<M> button
<0> button
LCD monitor
<V> <U>
keys
Menus in Basic Zone Modes
* Some menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
Menus in Creative Zone Modes
3 Playback
A Live View shooting
z Shooting
5 Set-up
8 Custom Functions
9 My Menu
Tab
Menu items
52
Menu settings
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
1
Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
a tab.
2 Select
Press the <U> key to select a
menu tab.
For example, in this manual, “the [z4]
tab” refers to the screen displayed
when the forth z (Shooting) tab from
the left [ ] is selected.
the desired item.
3 Select
Press the <V> key to select the
item, then press <0>.
4
Select the setting.
Press the <V> <U> keys to select
the desired setting. (Some settings
require you to press either the <V>
<U> keys to select them.)
The current setting is indicated in blue.
the setting.
5 Adjust
Press <0> to finalize your changes.
the setting.
6 ExitPress
the <M> button to return to
the shooting function settings display.
In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab. In step
4, you can also turn the <5> dial to select certain settings.
In steps 2 to 5, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.54).
The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
For details about each menu item, see page 408.
53
d Using the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can operate with
your fingers.
Tap
Quick Control (Sample display)
Use your finger to tap (touch briefly
and then remove your finger from) the
LCD monitor.
By tapping, you can select menus,
icons, etc., displayed on the LCD
monitor.
When touch-screen operation is
possible, a frame will appear around
the icon (except on menu screens).
For example, when you tap [Q], the
Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Operations possible by tapping the screen
Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button
Quick Control
Setting functions after pressing the <f>, <R>, <i>, <q>,
<S>, or <B> button
Touch shutter during Live View shooting
Setting functions during Live View shooting
Setting functions during movie shooting
Playback operations
54
d Using the Touch Screen
Drag
Menu screen (Sample display)
Slide your finger while touching the
LCD monitor.
Scale display (Sample display)
Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen
Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button
Setting a scale control
Quick Control
Setting functions during Live View shooting
Setting functions during movie shooting
Playback operations
3 Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Touch to
beep will not sound during touch
operations.
], the
55
d Using the Touch Screen
3 Touch Control Settings
1
Select [Touch control].
Under the [53] tab, select [Touch
control], then press <0>.
the touch control setting.
2 SetSelect
the desired setting, then press
<0>.
[Standard] is the normal setting.
[Sensitive] provides a better touch
response than [Standard]. Try using
both settings and select the one you
prefer.
To disable touch-screen operations,
select [Disable].
Cautions for Touch Screen Operations
Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp
objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.
Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations.
If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch
screen may not respond or misoperation may occur. In such a case, turn
off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.
Do not attach any protective sheet (commercially available) or sticker on
the LCD monitor. It may make the touch operation response slow.
If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
response may be slower.
56
Before You Start
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with the camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card
will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer
the images and data to a computer, etc., before formatting the
card.
1
Select [Format card].
Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
the card.
2 Format
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The card will be formatted.
X When the formatting is completed,
the menu will reappear.
For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to append [Low level
format] with a checkmark <X>, then
select [OK].
57
Before You Start
Format the card in the following cases:
The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.432).
Low-level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to erase all data on the card.
Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as
usual.
When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software on the card must be
installed in your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
58
Before You Start
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,
during self-timer operation, and during touch screen operations.
1
Select [Beep].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep],
then press <0>.
[Disable].
2 Select
Select [Disable], then press <0>.
X The beeper will not sound for any
operation.
If [Touch to ] is selected, the
beeper will be silent for touch screen
operations only.
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set
time of idle operation elapses. If you do not want the camera to turn off
automatically, set this to [Disable]. After the power turns off, you can
turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other
buttons.
1
Select [Auto power off].
Under the [52] tab, select [Auto
power off], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 SetSelect
the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30
min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)
59
Before You Start
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after capture. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To
not have the image displayed, set [Off].
1
Select [Image review].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 SetSelect
the desired setting, then press
<0>.
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time
elapses.
3 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On
The shooting function settings screen (p.49) can be set to display or
turn off when you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Select [LCD off/on btn].
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD off/
on btn], then press <0>.
the desired setting.
2 SetSelect
the desired setting, then press
<0>.
[Remains on]: Display remains on even when you press the shutter
button halfway. To turn off the display, press the
<B> button.
[Shutter btn.]: When you press the shutter button halfway, the
display will turn off. When you let go of the shutter
button, the display will turn on.
60
Before You Start
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults.
1
Select [Clear all camera settings].
Under the [54] tab, select [Clear all
camera settings], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X Setting [Clear all camera settings]
will reset the camera to the following
default settings:
Shooting Function Settings
AF operation
One-Shot AF
AF area selection mode Auto selection:19 pt AF
Red-eye
reduction
Disable
Metering mode
q (Evaluative metering)
Multiple exposure Disable
ISO speed
Auto
HDR Mode
Disable HDR
ISO speed range
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 12800
Mirror lockup
Disable
VF grid display
Disable
Auto ISO range
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 6400
Viewfinder level
Hide
Minimum shutter
speed
Auto
Drive mode
u (Single shooting)
Exposure
Canceled
compensation/AEB
Flash exposure
compensation
Custom Functions Unchanged
Flash control
Flash firing
Enable
Flash sync. speed
Auto
in Av mode
0 (Zero)
61
Before You Start
Image-recording Settings
Camera Settings
Image quality
73
Auto power off
1 min.
Picture Style
Auto
Beep
Enable
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Standard
Release shutter
without card
Enable
Peripheral
illumination
correction
Enable/
Correction data
retained
Image review
2 sec.
Highlight alert
Disable
AF point display
Disable
Chromatic
aberration
correction
Enable/
Correction data
retained
Playback grid
Off
Histogram display
Brightness
White balance
Q (Auto)
Control over HDMI
Disable
Image jump w/6
e (10 images)
Auto rotate
OnzD
Custom White
Balance
White balance
correction
Canceled
Canceled
White balance
bracketing
Canceled
Color space
sRGB
Long exposure
noise reduction
Disable
Movie playback count Unchanged
LCD brightness
LCD off/on button
Remains on
Touch control
Standard
Date/Time/Zone
Unchanged
Language
Unchanged
Video system
Unchanged
Feature guide
Enable
z button display options All items selected
High ISO speed
noise reduction
Standard
Highlight tone
priority
Disable
File numbering
Continuous
My Menu settings
Auto cleaning
Enable
Display from My Menu Disable
Dust Delete Data
Erase
Wi-Fi*
Custom shooting mode Unchanged
Copyright information Unchanged
Eye-Fi transmission Disable
Unchanged
Disable
* The EOS 70D (N) does not have the
Wi-Fi function (Not Displayed).
Refer to the Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual for Wi-Fi function settings.
62
Before You Start
Live View Shooting Settings
Live View
shooting
Enable
Movie Shooting Settings
AF method
u+Tracking
Movie Servo AF Enable
AF method
u+Tracking
Continuous AF
Enable
Silent LV
shooting
Mode 1
Touch shutter
Disable
Metering timer
16 sec.
Grid display
Off
Grid display
Off
Aspect ratio
3:2
1920x1080/IPB
Exposure
simulation
Movie
recording size
Enable
Digital zoom
Disable
Silent LV
shooting
Mode 1
Sound
recording
Auto
Metering timer
16 sec.
Time code
Count up
Unchanged
Start time
setting
Unchanged
Movie
Unchanged
recording count
Movie
Unchanged
playback count
Drop frame
Unchanged
Video snapshot Disable
63
Displaying the Grid
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you straighten or
compose the shot.
1
Select [VF grid display].
Under the [z1] tab, select [VF grid
display], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
X When you exit the menu, the grid will
appear in the viewfinder.
A grid can also be displayed on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting
and movie shooting (p.229, 276).
64
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder to help correct camera tilt. Note that you can check only the
horizontal tilt and not the forward/backward tilt.
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
1
Press the <B> button.
Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
Display the electronic level.
If the electronic level does not
appear, set [53: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
(p.394).
the camera’s tilt.
2 Check
The horizontal tilt is displayed in 1°
Horizontal level
increments. The tilt scale is marked in
5° increments.
When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is almost
corrected.
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of ±1°.
If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be
larger.
During Live View shooting and before movie shooting (except with u+
Tracking), you can also display the electronic level as described above
(p.218, 258). Note that the electronic level cannot be displayed during movie
shooting. (The electronic level will disappear when you start shooting a
movie.)
65
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
During Shooting
A simple electronic level using a camera icon can be displayed in the
viewfinder at the center bottom. Since this can be displayed while you
shoot, you can correct any tilt during handheld shooting.
1
Select [Viewfinder level].
Under the [z1] tab, select
[Viewfinder level], then press <0>.
[Show].
2 Select
Select [Show], then press <0>.
the shutter button halfway.
3 Press
X The electronic level will appear as
shown in the illustration.
Horizontal
Tilt 1°
Electronic level
Tilt 2° or higher
This also works with vertical shooting.
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of ±1°.
66
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
Before ShootingN
The viewfinder can display an electronic level and grid using the AF
points. This is convenient to correct any camera tilt before shooting with
a tripod.
1
Select Custom Functions III.
Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn III:
Operation/Others], then press
<0>.
C.Fn III -4 [Custom
2 Select
Controls].
Press the <U> key to select [4:
Custom Controls], then press <0>.
[e].
3 Select
Select [e: DOF preview button],
then press <0>.
[Q].
4 Select
Select [Q: VF electronic level],
then press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
67
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
the electronic level.
5 Display
Press the Depth-of-field preview
button.
X The viewfinder will display an
electronic level and grid using the AF
points.
1°
6° Over
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of ±1°.
If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be
larger.
If the Depth-of-field preview button has been assigned with [VF
electronic level], depth-of-field preview (p.163) will not work.
68
Feature Guide and Help
The Feature guide and Help display information about camera features.
Feature Guide
The Feature guide appears when you change the shooting mode or set
a shooting function, Live View shooting, movie shooting, or Quick
Control for playback, and displays a brief description of that mode,
function or option. It also displays a description when you select a
function or option on the Quick Control screen. When you proceed with
the operation, the Feature guide will disappear.
Shooting mode (Sample)
Quick Control (Sample)
Shooting function settings
Live View shooting
Playback
3 Disabling the Feature Guide
Select [Feature guide].
Under the [53] tab, select [Feature
guide], then press <0>.
Select [Disable], then press <0>.
69
Feature Guide and Help
Help
When [zHelp] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen,
pressing the <B> button displays the function’s description (Help). If
the Help fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right
edge. You can turn the <5> dial or press the <V> key to scroll.
Example: [z4: Long exp. noise reduction]
B
Î
Scroll bar
Example: [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments]
B
Î
Example: [8C.Fn II-1: Tracking sensitivity]
B
Î
70
2
Basic Shooting
This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes
on the Mode Dial for best results.
ne ne
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot while the
camera sets everything automatically (p.91, 404). Also, to
prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations,
advanced shooting function settings cannot be changed.
Zo
ic o
Basic Z
s
Ba
When you set the Mode Dial to <8> while the LCD monitor is
turned off, press the <Q> button (p.81) or <B> button (p.394)
to check which shooting mode is set before shooting.
71
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.75).
1
Area AF frame
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
Turn the Mode Dial while holding
down the lock release button at the
center.
the Area AF frame over the
2 Aim
subject.
All the AF points will be used to focus,
and generally the closest object will
be focused.
Aiming the center of the Area AF
frame over the subject will make
focusing easier.
the subject.
3 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens focusing ring will rotate to focus.
X The AF point(s) that achieve(s) focus
will be displayed. At the same time,
the beeper will sound and the focus
confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will light up.
X In low light, the AF point(s) will light
up briefly in red.
X If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.
Focus confirmation light
72
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
the picture.
4 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
X The captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
After you finish shooting, push down
the built-in flash with your fingers.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative
Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than <D> and shoot (p.126).
FAQ
The focus confirmation light <o> blinks and focus is not
achieved.
Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press
the shutter button halfway (p.45). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again.
Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. As long as the AF point
covering the desired subject lights up, you can take the picture.
The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation
light <o> does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus confirmation light <o> does not light up.) You
can take sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Note that focus lock (p.75) will not work in this case.
Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
73
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
The flash fired even though it was daylight.
For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s
dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control
to set [Flash firing] to [b] (p.90) or set the <7> (Flash Off) mode
and shoot (p.77).
The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.
Move further from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash
photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture
may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to
fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AFassist beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out
unnaturally dark.
The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because
the subject was too close to the camera. Move further from the
subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before
taking the flash picture.
74
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus
a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the
shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is
called “focus lock”. Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone
modes (except <5>).
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject
continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long as you
keep aiming the Area AF frame on the subject while pressing the
shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous. When you want
to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.
75
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 215.
the Live View shooting/Movie
1 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image on
2 Display
the LCD monitor.
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.
the subject.
3 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
the picture.
4 TakePress
the shutter button completely.
X The picture will be taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
X After the image review ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <0> button to end the
Live View shooting.
You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions (p.34).
Normal angle
76
Low angle
High angle
7 Disabling Flash
<7> is a fully-automatic shooting mode that does not use flash. It is
useful in museums, aquariums, and other places where flash is
prohibited. This mode is also effective for capturing the particular
ambience of a scene, such as candlelight scenes.
Shooting Tips
Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder
blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the
camera.
Take portraits without flash.
In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is
taken. Any movement by the subject during shooting may result in
the subject being blurred in the picture.
77
C Creative Auto Shooting
In the <C> mode, you can easily blur the background and change the
drive mode and flash firing. You can also choose the ambience you
want to convey in your images. The default settings are the same as the
<A> mode.
* CA stands for Creative Auto.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <C>.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired function.
3 SetPress
the <V> <U> keys to
select a function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.69) will appear.
For the setting procedure and details
on each function, see pages 79-80.
the picture.
4 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
78
C Creative Auto Shooting
Shutter speed
Aperture
ISO speed
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Battery check
Possible shots
Image-recording quality
Pressing the <Q> button enables you to set the following:
(1) Ambience-based shots
You can choose the ambience you want to convey in your images.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the desired ambience. You
can also select it from a list by pressing <0>. For details, see page
92.
(2) Blurring/sharpening the background
If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look
more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will
look more in focus. Set it by pressing the <U> key. You can also
turn the <6> or <5> dial to move the mark. If you want to blur the
background, see “Shooting Portraits” on page 82.
Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background
may not look so blurred. This function cannot be set (grayed out)
while the built-in flash is raised in the <a> or <D> mode. If flash is
used, this setting will not be applied.
79
C Creative Auto Shooting
(3) Drive mode: Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the desired drive
mode. You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<u> Single shooting:
Shoot one image at a time.
<o> High-speed continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots
will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to approx. 7.0
shots per second.
<i> Low-speed continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots
will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to approx. 3.0
shots per second.
<B> Silent single shooting:
Single shooting with less shooting sound than <u>.
<M> Silent continuous shooting:
Continuous shooting (max. approx. 3.0 shots per second)
with less shooting sound than <i>.
< > Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control:
<
> Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control:
The picture is taken 10 seconds or 2 seconds after you
press the shutter button. A remote controller can also be
used.
(4) Flash firing: Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the desired
setting. You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<a> Auto flash : The flash fires automatically when necessary.
<I>
Flash on : The flash fires at all times.
<b> Flash off : The flash is disabled.
When using the self-timer, see the
notes on page 113.
When using <b>, see “Disabling Flash” on page 77.
80
8: Special Scene Mode
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when
you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
a shooting mode.
3 Select
Press the <V> <U> keys to
select a shooting mode icon.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select
a shooting mode.
You can also select the shooting
mode icon and press <0> to display
a list of shooting modes from which
you can select one.
Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode
Shooting Mode
2
Portrait
Page
p.82
3
Landscape
4
Close-up
5
Sports
p.85
Shooting Mode
6
Night Portrait
Page
p.86
p.83
F
Handheld Night Scene
p.87
p.84
G
HDR Backlight Control
p.88
81
2 Shooting Portraits
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
The further the distance between the subject and background,
the better.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand
out better against an uncluttered dark background.
Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.
Focus the face.
Check that the AF point covering the face flashes. For close-ups of
the face, focus on the eyes.
The default setting is <i> (low-speed continuous shooting). If you hold
down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture subtle
changes in the subject’s pose and facial expression (max. approx. 3.0 shots/
sec.).
82
3 Shooting Landscapes
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and
very sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far
will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth
to landscapes.
Shooting night scenes.
The <3> mode is also good for night scenes because it disables
the built-in flash. When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to
prevent camera shake.
The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.
If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.
83
4 Shooting Close-ups
When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4>
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a
macro lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
Use a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out
better.
Move as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses
have indications such as <MACRO 0.39m/1.3ft> on them. The lens
minimum focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal
plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too
close to the subject, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.
If you use flash and the bottom of the picture looks unusually dark,
move away from the subject.
With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the
subject look larger.
84
5 Shooting Moving Subjects
Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a
running child or a moving vehicle.
Shooting Tips
Use a telephoto lens.
The use of a telephoto lens is recommended for shooting from a
distance.
Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter
button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF frame. During
autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly. If focus cannot
be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.
The default setting is <o> (high-speed continuous shooting).
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button
completely. If you hold down the shutter button, you will be able to
maintain autofocusing during continuous shooting of the subject’s
movement (max. approx. 7.0 shots per sec.).
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s
shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera
steady and shoot.
If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.
85
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)
To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the
background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Using a tripod is
recommended.
Shooting Tips
Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide
night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
Check the subject’s brightness.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a
good exposure of the subject.
It is recommended to play back the image after the shooting to
check the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer
and shoot again.
Also shoot in another shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also
with <A> and <F> is recommended.
Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.
If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light
up briefly after the picture is taken.
See the cautions on page 89.
86
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)
Using a tripod for shooting a night scene yields the best results.
However, with the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode, you can shoot
night scenes while handholding the camera. In this mode, four shots are
taken continuously for each picture, and a resulting bright image with
reduced camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
For shots of people, turn on the flash.
If you will include people in the picture, press the <Q> button and
set <D> (Flash on). To take a nice portrait, the first shot will use
flash. Tell the subject not to move until all four continuous shots are
taken.
See the cautions on page 89.
87
G Shooting Backlit Scenes
When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the
<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this
mode, three continuous shots are taken at different exposures. This
results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the
blocked-up shadows caused by backlighting.
Shooting Tips
Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
Flash shooting is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be
emitted (p.102).
See the cautions on pages 89-90.
HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
88
Cautions for <6> Night Portrait and <F> Handheld Night Scene
During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus dots of light such as
in a night scene. In such a case, set the lens’ focus mode switch to <MF>
and focus manually.
Cautions for <F> Handheld Night Scene and <G> HDR Backlight Control
Compared with other shooting modes, the shooting area will be smaller.
You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG. If RAW is set, the image will be
recorded in the 73 quality. Also, if RAW+JPEG is set, the image will be
recorded in the set JPEG quality.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
The image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly
misaligned due to camera shake.
Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel and you cannot take another
picture until the processing is completed.
If the shooting mode is set to <F> or <G>, direct printing (p.346) is not
possible.
Cautions for <6> Night Portrait
During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus when the face of
the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’ focus mode switch to
<MF> and focus manually.
Cautions for <F> Handheld Night Scene
When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the
camera, the picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
If you use flash to shoot a night scene with few lights, the shots may not
align correctly. This can result in a blurry photo.
If you use flash and the human subject is close to the background that is
also illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This can
result in a blurry photo. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may
also appear.
External Speedlite flash coverage
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the
zoom position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the lens’
zoom position.
• When using a Speedlite requiring manual flash coverage setting, set
the flash head to the wide (normal) position.
89
Q Quick Control
Cautions for <G> HDR Backlight Control
Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit
scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.
Q Quick Control
In Basic Zone modes when the shooting function settings screen is
displayed, you can press the <Q> button to display the Quick Control
screen. The table on the next page shows the functions that can be set
with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode.
the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone
1 Set
mode.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
Example: Portrait mode
the desired functions.
3 SetPress
the <V> <U> keys to
select a function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.69) will appear.
Functions can also be selected with
the <6> or <5> dial.
90
Q Quick Control
Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes
o: Default setting k: User selectable
: Not selectable
Function
A
7
C
u: Single shooting
o: High-speed continuous shooting
i: Low-speed continuous shooting
Drive
B: Silent single shooting
mode
M: Silent continuous shooting
Q
Self-timer (p.113)
k
a: Automatic firing
Flash
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
firing
b: Flash off
Ambience-based shots (p.92)
Light/scene-based shots (p.96)
Blurring/sharpening the background (p.79)
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
Function
o
8
2
3
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
4
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
5
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
8
6
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
F
G
u: Single shooting
o
o
o: High-speed continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
i: Low-speed continuous shooting
Drive
B: Silent single shooting
k
k
mode
M: Silent continuous shooting
k
k
Q
k
k
Self-timer (p.113)
k
k
k
a: Automatic firing
Flash
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
k
firing
b: Flash off
o
o
o
Ambience-based shots (p.92)
k
k
k
Light/scene-based shots (p.96)
k
Blurring/sharpening the background (p.79)
* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, it will revert
to the default settings (except the self-timer).
91
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Except in the <A>, <7>, and <G> Basic Zone modes, you can
select the ambience for shooting.
C
8
2 3 4 5 6 F
Standard setting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
No setting
Vivid
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low / Standard / Strong
Soft
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low / Standard / Strong
Warm
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low / Standard / Strong
Intense
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low / Standard / Strong
Cool
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low / Standard / Strong
Brighter
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low / Medium / High
Darker
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low / Medium / High
Monochrome
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Blue / B/W / Sepia
Ambience
1
Ambience Effect
Set the shooting mode to <C> or <8>.
If the shooting mode is <8>, set
one of the following: <2>, <3>,
<4>, <5>, <6>, or <F>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
3 Display
Press the <0> button to display the
Live View image.
4
On the Quick Control screen,
select the desired ambience.
Press the <Q> button (7).
Press the <V> key to select [
Standard setting]. [Ambiencebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
Press the <U> key to select the
desired ambience.
92
Shoot by Ambience Selection
X The LCD monitor will display how the
image will look with the selected
ambience.
the ambience effect.
5 SetPress
the <V> key to select the
effect bar so that [Effect] appears at
the bottom.
Press the <U> key to select the
desired effect.
the picture.
6 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to
[
Standard setting].
The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not
look exactly the same as the actual photo.
Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.
In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the LCD monitor may
not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo.
Set [52: LCD brightness] to 4 and look at the Live View image while the
LCD monitor is unaffected by outside light.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed while setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Ambience-based
shots] and [Effect].
93
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Ambience Settings
Standard setting
Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.
Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and
<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of
the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.
Vivid
The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more
impressive than with [
Standard setting].
Soft
The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits,
pets, flowers, etc.
Warm
The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,
pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.
Intense
While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is
emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living
subject stand out more.
Cool
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A
subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.
94
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Brighter
The picture will look brighter.
Darker
The picture will look darker.
Monochrome
The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome
color to be black and white, sepia, or blue. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <z> will appear in the viewfinder.
95
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
In the <2>, <3>, <4>, and <5> Basic Zone modes, you can shoot
while the settings match the lighting or scene type. Normally, [
Default setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting
condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eye.
For Live View shooting, if you set both [Light/scene-based shots] and
[Ambience-based shots] (p.92), you should first set [Light/scenebased shots]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the
LCD monitor.
Lighting or scene
8
2
3
4
5
Default setting
k
k
k
k
Daylight
k
k
k
k
Shade
k
k
k
k
Cloudy
k
k
k
k
Tungsten light
k
k
k
Fluorescent light
k
k
k
Sunset
k
k
k
k
1
Set the shooting mode to <8>.
Set one of the following: <2>, <3>,
<4>, or <5>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
3 Display
Press the <0> button to display the
Live View image.
96
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
the Quick Control screen,
4 On
select the lighting or scene type.
Press the <Q> button (7).
Press the <V> key to select [
Default setting]. [Light/scenebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
Press the <U> key to select the
desired lighting or scene type.
X The resulting image with the selected
lighting or scene type will be
displayed.
the picture.
5 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [
Default
setting].
If you use flash, the setting will switch to [
Default setting]. (However,
the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was
set.)
If you want to set this together with [Ambience-based shots], set the
lighting or scene type that best matches the ambience you have set. In
the case of [Sunset], for example, warm colors will become prominent so
the ambience you set may not work well.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Light/scene-based
shots].
97
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
Lighting or Scene Type Settings
Default setting
Default setting suited for most subjects.
Daylight
For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies
and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.
Shade
For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look
too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.
Cloudy
For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and
landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look
warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.
Tungsten light
For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange
color cast caused by tungsten lighting.
Fluorescent light
For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of
fluorescent lighting.
Sunset
Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.
98
3
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The 19 AF points in the viewfinder
make AF shooting suitable for a
wide variety of subjects and
scenes.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
In Basic Zone modes, the AF operation and AF point (AF
area selection mode) are set automatically.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
99
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation
is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<AF>.
the Mode Dial to a Creative
2 Turn
Zone mode.
3 Press the <f> button. (9)
the AF operation.
4 Select
While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
X : One-Shot AF
9 : AI Focus AF
Z : AI Servo AF
In Creative Zone modes, you can also press the <p> button to
autofocus.
100
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
When focus is achieved, the AF point
that achieved focus will be displayed,
and the focus confirmation light <o>
in the viewfinder will also light up.
With evaluative metering, the
AF point
exposure setting will be set at the
Focus confirmation light
same time focus is achieved.
While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the
shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to
focus again, or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.109).
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved.
After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a subject
and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is convenient when
you want to focus on a subject not covered by the Area AF frame.
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
When the AF area selection mode is set to 19-point automatic selection AF
(p.103), the camera first uses the manually-selected AF point to focus. During
autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the manually-selected AF point,
focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by the Area AF frame.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
101
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and keep tracking the
moving subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus confirmation
light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be
locked in this case.
AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,
the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the
subject to enable easier autofocusing.
AF-assist beam will not be emitted by the built-in flash in <7>, <3>, or
<5> mode, or when [Flash firing] is set to <b> in <A>, <C>,
<2>, <4>, or <F> mode.
The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.
The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is
approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the <I>
button, the AF-assist beam will fire when necessary.
102
S Selecting the AF AreaN
19 AF points are provided for AF. You can select the AF point(s) suiting
the scene or subject.
AF Area Selection Mode
You can select one of three AF area selection modes. See the next
page for the selection procedure.
: Single-point AF (Manual
selection)
Select one AF point to focus.
: Zone AF (Manual zone
selection)
The 19 AF points are divided into five
zones for focusing.
: 19-point automatic selection
AF
All the AF points are used to focus. This
mode is set automatically in Basic
Zone modes.
103
S Selecting the AF AreaN
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode
1
Press the <S> or <B> button.
(9)
Look through the viewfinder and
press the <S> or <B> button.
the <B> button.
2 Press
Each time you press the <B>
AF area selection mode
button, the AF area selection mode
changes.
The AF area selection mode currently
set is indicated on the top of the
viewfinder.
: Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
: Zone AF
(Manual zone selection)
: 19-point automatic selection
AF
With [8C.Fn II-7: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the
selectable AF area selection modes (p.372).
If you set [8C.Fn II-8: AF area selection method] to [ 9Main Dial],
you can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S> or
<B> button, then turning the <6> dial (p.372).
104
S Selecting the AF AreaN
Selecting the AF Point Manually
You can manually select the AF point or zone. If 19-point automatic
selection AF + AI Servo AF has been set, you can select any position
where AI Servo AF is to start.
1
Press the <S> or <B> button.
(9)
X The AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
In the Zone AF mode, the selected
zone will be displayed.
an AF point.
2 Select
The AF point selection will change in
the direction you tilt <9>. If you
press <0>, the center AF point (or
center zone) will be selected.
You can also select a horizontal AF
point by turning the <6> dial and
select a vertical AF point by turning
the <5> dial.
In the Zone AF mode, turning the
<6> or <5> dial will change the
zone in a looping sequence.
When you hold down the <Q> button and turn the <6> dial, you can
select a vertical AF point.
When you press the <S> or <B> button, the LCD panel displays the
following:
• 19-point automatic selection AF and Zone AF (manual zone selection):
AF
• 1 pt AF (Manual selection): SEL (Center)/SEL AF (Off center)
With [8C.Fn II-10: Manual AF pt. selec. pattern], you can set either
[Stops at AF area edges] or [Continuous] (p.373).
105
AF Area Selection Modes
Single-point AF (Manual Selection)
Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.
Zone AF (Manual Zone Selection)
The 19 AF points are divided into five zones for focusing. All the AF
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic selection of the
point of focus. It makes achieving focus easier than with single-point AF
and it is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus the nearest subject, focusing a
specific target is harder than with single-point AF.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
106
AF Area Selection Modes
19-point Automatic Selection AF
All the AF points are used to focus. This mode is set automatically in
Basic Zone modes.
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are displayed,
it means they all have achieved focus. This mode
tends to focus the nearest subject.
With AI Servo AF, the manually-selected (p.105) AF
point <S> is used first to achieve focus. The AF
point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
When AI Servo AF mode is set with 19-point automatic selection AF or
Zone AF, the active AF point <S> will keep switching to track the
subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the
subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject. Also, in low
temperatures, the tracking response is slower.
If the camera cannot focus with the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite’s
AF-assist beam, set the AF area selection mode to Single-point AF
(manual selection) and select the center AF point to autofocus.
When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in
red. This is a characteristic of AF point display (using liquid crystal).
If you set [8C.Fn II-9 : Orientation linked AF point] to [1: Select
separate AF points], you can set the AF area selection mode and
manually-selected AF point (or zone) separately for vertical and horizontal
shooting (p.373).
107
AF Area Selection Modes
AF Operation and Maximum Lens Apertures
Maximum Lens Aperture: f/3.2 - f/5.6
With all AF points, cross-type AF sensitive to both vertical and
horizontal lines is possible. However, with the lenses below, the
peripheral AF points will detect only vertical or horizontal lines (no
cross-type focusing).
Lenses that Do Not Support Cross-Type Focusing with
Peripheral AF Points
Cross-type focusing
Vertical line-sensitive focusing
Horizontal line-sensitive focusing
Cross-type focusing at the < > and < > AF points is not possible with the
following lenses:
EF 35-80mm f/4-5.6, EF 35-80mm f/4-5.6 II, EF 35-80mm f/4-5.6 III,
EF 35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM, EF 35-105mm f/4.5-5.6, EF 35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
USM, EF 80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II, EF 80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
Maximum Lens Aperture: f/1.0 - f/2.8
Besides cross-type focusing (vertical and horizontal lines detected
simultaneously), the center AF point can also perform high-precision,
vertical-line sensitive AF.*
The remaining 18 AF points perform cross-type focusing, as with when
maximum lens aperture is f/3.2 - f/5.6.
* Except with the EF 28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF 50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro.
108
When Autofocus Fails
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus confirmation light
<o> blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Subjects Difficult to Focus
Very low-contrast subjects
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)
Subjects in very low light
Extremely backlit and reflective subjects
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)
Near and far subjects covered by an AF point
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)
Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, do either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus before recomposing the shot (p.75).
(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually
(p.110).
For subjects difficult to focus during Live View shooting or movie shooting
with [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone - Single], see page
241.
109
When Autofocus Fails
MF: Manual Focus
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
X <4 L> will be displayed on the
LCD panel.
Focusing ring
the subject.
2 Focus
Focus by turning the lens focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF point
that achieved focus and the focus confirmation light <o> will light up in the
viewfinder.
110
i Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided.
1
Press the <R> button. (9)
the drive mode.
2 Select
While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
o : High-speed continuous shooting (Max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec.)
i : Low-speed continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be
taken continuously.
B : Silent single shooting
Single shooting with less shooting sound than <u>.
M : Silent continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)
Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than <i>.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/remote control
k : 2-sec. self-timer/remote control
For self-timer shooting, see page 113. For remote control
shooting, see page 184.
111
i Selecting the Drive Mode
If <B> or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the picture is shot will be slightly longer than with
normal single or continuous shooting.
When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting speed may
become slightly slower.
In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
o: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 7 shots/sec. is
attained under the following conditions*: At 1/500 sec. or faster shutter
speed, and at the maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens). The
continuous shooting speed may decrease due to shutter speed,
aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature,
battery remaining capacity, etc.
* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when
using the following lenses: EF 300mm f/4L IS USM, EF 28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
USM, EF 75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF 100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
When using Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately) and size-AA/LR6
batteries, high-speed continuous shooting speed will be slower.
112
j Using the Self-timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.
1 Press the <R> button. (9)
the self-timer.
2 Select
While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select the
self-timer delay.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer
k : 2-sec. self-timer
picture.
3 TakeLookthethrough
the viewfinder, focus
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
X You can check the self-timer
operation with the self-timer lamp,
beeper, and countdown display (in
seconds) on the LCD panel.
X Two seconds before the picture is
taken, the self-timer lamp will light up
and the beeper will sound faster.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,
attach the eyepiece cover (p.183). If stray light enters the viewfinder when
the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
The <k> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera
mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake while you shoot still
lifes or long exposures.
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.290) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.75) on
an object at about the same distance as where you will stand.
To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <R> button.
113
114
4
Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, white
balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, lens peripheral
illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction,
and other functions.
In Basic Zone modes, only the following can be set as
described in this chapter: Image-recording quality, lens
peripheral illumination correction, lens chromatic aberration
correction, folder creation and selection, and image file
numbering.
The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
115
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight JPEG imagerecording quality settings: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b, c. There are
three RAW image quality settings: 1, 41, 61 (p.118).
1
Select [Image quality].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
the image-recording quality.
2 Select
To select a RAW setting, turn the
<6> dial. To select a JPEG setting,
press the <U> key.
On the upper right of the screen,
“***M (megapixels) **** x ****”
indicates the recorded pixel count,
and [***] is the number of possible
shots (displayed up to 999).
Press <0> to set it.
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples
73 only
1 only
1+73
61+74
If [-] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.
116
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)
Image
Quality
Pixels
Recorded
Printing
Size
20M
A2
8.9M
A3
5.0M
A4
b*1
2.5M
9x13 cm
1.3
4990
4990 (4990)
c*2
0.3M
-
0.3
19380
19380 (19380)
1
15 (16)
73
83
74
JPEG
84
7a
8a
File Size
(MB)
Possible
Shots
Maximum
Burst
6.6
1000
40 (65)
3.5
1920
130 (1920)
3.6
1840
100 (1840)
1.8
3410
3410 (3410)
2.3
2790
430 (2790)
1.2
5200
5200 (5200)
20M
A2
24.0
260
RAW 41
11M
A3
19.3
370
9 (10)
61
5.0M
A4
13.3
470
11 (13)
1
73
20M
20M
A2
A2
24.0+6.6
200
8 (8)
11M
20M
A3
A2
19.3+6.6
270
8 (8)
5.0M
20M
A4
A2
13.3+6.6
320
8 (8)
RAW
41
+
73
JPEG
61
73
*1: b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame.
*2: c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a website.
b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.
The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting
are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and
Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB card. These figures will vary
depending on the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
The maximum burst applies to <o> high-speed continuous shooting.
Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I class 8 GB card based on Canon’s
testing standards.
Even if you use a UHS-I class card, the maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in parentheses in the table will apply instead.
117
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with
the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for
RAW).
The image-recording quality icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41
(Middle RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG, 7 (Fine), 8 (Normal), 3
(Large), 4 (Middle), 6 (Small).
RAW Images
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.
A 1 image can be processed with [31: RAW image processing]
(p.328) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images cannot
be processed with the camera.) While the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image according to different
conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.
With all RAW images, you can use Digital Photo Professional (provided
software, p.457) to make various adjustments and then generate a
JPEG, TIFF, etc., image incorporating those adjustments.
To display RAW images on a computer, using the provided software is
recommended (p.457).
Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken by the camera. For details on commercially-available
software, contact the software manufacturer.
118
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Maximum Burst During Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is
displayed on the bottom right in the
viewfinder and on the shooting function
settings screen.
If the maximum burst for continuous
shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be
displayed.
The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the
camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower
and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.
If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all
the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous
shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on page 117.
119
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set
automatically (p.122).
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 254 and
257.
1
Press the <i> button. (9)
the ISO speed.
2 SetWhile
looking at the LCD panel or the
viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>
dial.
ISO speed can be set within ISO 100
- ISO 12800 in 1/3-stop increments.
“A” indicates Auto ISO. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
(p.122).
When the screen shown on the left is
displayed, you can press the <B>
button to set it to “AUTO”.
ISO Speed Guide
ISO Speed
Shooting Situation
(No flash)
ISO 100 - ISO 400
Sunny outdoors
ISO 400 - ISO 1600
Overcast skies or evening time
ISO 1600 ISO 12800, H
Dark indoors or night
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
120
Flash Range
The higher the ISO
speed, the farther the
flash range will be.
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], ISO 100/125/160 and
“H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be set (p.145).
Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
As “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is an expanded ISO speed setting,
noise (such as dots of light and banding) and irregular colors will be more
noticeable, and the resolution will be lower than usual.
If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
If you shoot a movie while “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is set, it will
switch to ISO 12800 (with movie manual exposure shooting). Even if you
switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not revert to the
original setting.
Under [z3: ISO speed settings], you can use [ISO speed range] to
expand the settable ISO speed range up to ISO 25600 (H) (p.123).
<z> can be displayed in the viewfinder when you set the “H” expanded
ISO speed (p.376).
121
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Auto ISO
If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway.
As indicated below, the ISO speed will
be set automatically to suit the shooting
mode.
Shooting Mode
A/7/C
2/4/5/6/G
8
ISO Speed Setting
Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400
3
Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 1600
F
Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 12800
d/s/f/a
Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 12800*1
F
ISO 400*1
With flash
ISO 400*1*2*3*4
*1 : The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]
settings set in [Auto ISO range].
*2 : If fill flash will cause overexposure, the minimum ISO 100 will be set (except
in the a and F modes).
*3 : Except in the A, 6, and F modes.
*4 : When using bounce flash with an external Speedlite in the C, 2, 3, 4,
5, or d mode, the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 400 - ISO
1600.
122
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO
12800 and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - H (equivalent to ISO
25600).
1
Select [ISO speed settings].
Under the [z3] tab, select [ISO
speed settings], then press <0>.
[ISO speed range].
2 Select
Select [ISO speed range], then press
<0>.
the minimum limit.
3 SetSelect
the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
Press the <V> key to select an ISO
speed, then press <0>.
the maximum limit.
4 SetSelect
the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
Press the <V> key to select an ISO
speed, then press <0>.
the setting.
5 ExitPress
the <U> key to select [OK],
then press <0>.
X The menu reappears.
123
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for Auto ISO
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100
- ISO 12800. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 6400,
and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 12800 in whole-stop
increments.
1
Select [Auto ISO range].
Select [Auto ISO range], then press
<0>.
the minimum limit.
2 SetSelect
the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
Press the <V> key to select an ISO
speed, then press <0>.
the maximum limit.
3 SetSelect
the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
Press the <V> key to select an ISO
speed, then press <0>.
the setting.
4 ExitPress
the <U> key to select [OK],
then press <0>.
X The menu reappears.
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also apply to the ISO speed
safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speeds (p.367).
124
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO
When Auto ISO is set, you can set the minimum shutter speed (1/250
sec. to 1 sec.) so that the automatically-set shutter speed is not too
slow.
This is convenient in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wideangle lens to shoot a moving subject. You can minimize both camera
shake and subject blur.
1
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
Select [Min. shutter spd.], then
press <0>.
the desired minimum shutter
2 Set
speed.
Press the <U> key to select the
shutter speed, then press <0>.
X The menu reappears.
If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto ISO range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min.
shutter spd.] will be set to obtain a standard exposure.
With flash photography, [Min. shutter spd.] will not be applied.
125
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In Basic Zone modes, <D> (Auto) is set automatically.
1
Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z4] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
X The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
Press the <V> key to select a
Picture Style, then press <0>.
X The Picture Style will be set.
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery, and
sunsets in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.129), you can adjust the skin
tone.
126
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
S Neutral
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.
U Faithful
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. When the subject is captured under a color
temperature of 5200 K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to
match the subject’s color. Images will appear dull and subdued.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color. If you
want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [Monochrome] setting
has been canceled.
<z> can be displayed in the viewfinder when [Monochrome] is set
(p.376).
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.132). Any User
Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same
default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.
127
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Symbols
The symbols of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. The numerals indicate the
parameter settings, such as for [Sharpness] and [Contrast], for each
Picture Style.
Symbols
g
128
Sharpness
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take
test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 131.
1
Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z4] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
X The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
Select a Picture Style, then press the
<B> button.
a parameter.
3 Select
Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
the parameter.
4 SetPress
the <U> key to adjust the
parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
129
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
X Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
Parameter Settings and Effects
g Sharpness
0: Less sharp outline
h Contrast
-4: Low contrast
+4: High contrast
i Saturation
-4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
j Color tone
-4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
+7: Sharp outline
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.
To use the adjusted Picture Style, first select the adjusted Picture Style,
then shoot.
130
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome Adjustment
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding
page.
kFilter Effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning Effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
131
A Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].
You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings for
parameters such as sharpness and contrast.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been
registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software, p.457).
1
Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z4] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
X The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
[User Def. *].
2 Select
Select [User Def. *], then press
<B>.
<0>.
3 Press
With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
4 Select
Press the <V> <U> keys to
select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that has been registered to the
camera with EOS Utility (provided
software), select the Picture Style here.
132
A Registering a Picture StyleN
a parameter.
5 Select
Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
the parameter.
6 SetPress
the <U> key to adjust the
parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” on page 129.
Press the <M> button to register
the modified Picture Style. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
X The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
X If the settings in a Picture Style
registered under [User Def. *] have
been modified from the base Picture
Style settings, the Picture Style’s
name will be displayed in blue.
If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],
changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.61), all the [User Def. *]
settings will revert to their defaults. Picture Styles registered via EOS
Utility (provided software) will have only their modified parameters
reverted to their default settings.
To use the adjusted Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *],
then shoot.
Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.453).
133
3 Setting the White BalanceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the
<Q> (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking
colors cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can select the white balance to
match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
In Basic Zone modes, <Q> is set automatically.
1
Select [White balance].
Under the [z3] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
a white balance setting.
2 Select
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Display
Q
W
E
R
Y
U
D
O
P
Mode
Color Temperature (Approx. K : Kelvin)
Auto
3000-7000
Daylight
5200
Shade
7000
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
6000
Tungsten light
3200
White fluorescent light
4000
Flash use
Automatically set*
Custom (p.135)
2000-10000
Color temperature (p.137)
2500-10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the color temperature is adjusted with
software to make the white areas look white. This adjustment serves as
the basis for the color correction. With this function, pictures with natural
color shades can be taken.
134
3 Setting the White BalanceN
O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure
under the actual light source to be used.
1
Shoot a white object.
Look through the viewfinder and aim
the entire dotted line box (shown in
the illustration) over a plain, white
object.
Focus manually and set the standard
exposure for the white object.
You can use any white balance
setting.
[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
Under the [z3] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
X The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
the white balance data.
3 Import
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
X On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
135
3 Setting the White BalanceN
[White balance].
4 Select
Under the [z3] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the custom white balance.
5 Select
Select [ ], then press <0>.
O
If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: images captured
while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure
images, and images shot with another camera.
Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.
The personal white balance registered with the provided software will be
registered under [O]. If you execute step 3, the data for the registered
personal white balance will be erased.
136
3 Setting the White BalanceN
P Setting the Color Temperature
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is
for advanced users.
1
Select [White balance].
Under the [z3] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the color temperature.
2 SetSelect
[P].
Turn the <6> dial to set the color
temperature, then press <0>.
The color temperature can be set
from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in
100 K increments.
When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.
If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
137
3 White Balance CorrectionN
You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment
will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color
can be corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color
temperature conversion or color compensating filters.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
Under the [z3] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
the white balance correction.
2 SetUse
<9> to move the “ ” mark to the
Sample setting: A2, G1
desired position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The color
in the respective direction will be
corrected.
On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
<z> can be displayed in the viewfinder when white balance correction
is set (p.376).
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
138
3 White Balance CorrectionN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be recorded
simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance
setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or magenta/
green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White
balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
B/A bias ±3 levels
In step 2 for “White Balance Correction”,
when you turn the <5> dial, the “ ”
mark on the screen will change to
“
” (3 points). Turning the dial to the
right sets the B/A bracketing, and turning
it to the left sets the M/G bracketing.
X On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction amount.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx.
one-third the normal number.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the shot to the card.
You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing (p.366).
“Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
139
3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.
1
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
3
Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the Auto Lighting
Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable] and the setting cannot be
changed.
Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
If the HDR mode (p.172) or multiple-exposure shooting (p.175) is set, the
Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable]. When the
HDR mode or multiple-exposure shooting is canceled, the Auto Lighting
Optimizer will revert to the original setting.
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and uncheck <X> the [Disabled
in M or B modes] setting, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can also be set in the
<a> and <F> modes.
140
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the
image (shadow areas) is further reduced.
1
Select [High ISO speed NR].
Under the [z4] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
the level.
2 SetSelect
the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction
This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
picture.
3 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
141
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may be minimal.
If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel and you cannot take another
picture until the processing is completed.
RAW images cannot be selected. You cannot use AEB and WB
bracketing. [z4: Long exp. noise reduction], [z4: Dust Delete
Data], [z4: Multiple exposure], and [z4: HDR Mode] cannot be set.
If any of these has already been selected or set, [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] cannot be set.
Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted
according to the [8C.Fn II-5: AF-assist beam firing] setting.
You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures.
If you turn off the power, change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone
mode or bulb, or switch to movie shooting, the setting will automatically
switch to [Standard].
Direct printing is not possible (p.346).
If you play back a 1 image with the camera or print an image directly, the
effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal. Check the
noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital Photo
Professional (provided software, p.457).
142
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
1
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
Under the [z4] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
the desired setting.
2 SetSelect
the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting can reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
picture.
3 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
143
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. During
noise reduction, shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst
indicator in the viewfinder shows “1” or higher.
Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
With [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “buSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
144
3 Highlight Tone PriorityN
You can minimize overexposed highlight areas.
1
Select [Highlight tone priority].
Under the [z4] tab, select
[Highlight tone priority], then press
<0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
Highlight details are improved. The
dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes
smoother.
picture.
3 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with
highlight tone priority applied.
With [Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.140) is automatically set to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed. When [Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Disable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will revert to its
original setting.
With [Enable], image noise (graininess and banding, etc.) may increase
slightly more than with [Disable].
With [Enable], the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800 (up to ISO
6400 for movies). Also, the <A> icon will be displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel when highlight tone priority is enabled.
145
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. Both lens aberrations can be
corrected. The default settings are [Enable] for both corrections.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
1
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If [Correction data not available] is
displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”
on page 148.
picture.
3 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.457).
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
146
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic Aberration Correction
1
Select the setting.
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If [Correction data not available] is
displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”
on the next page.
picture.
2 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
If you play back a 1 image shot with the chromatic aberration corrected,
the image will be displayed on the camera without the chromatic aberration
correction applied. Check the chromatic aberration correction with Digital
Photo Professional (provided software, p.457).
147
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction
data and chromatic aberration correction data for approx. 25 lenses. If
you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination correction and
chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any
lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (provided software), you can check which lenses have
their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual PDF (p.453) on the DVD-ROM.
Notes for Peripheral Illumination Correction and Chromatic Aberration
Correction
Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction
cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
If you use magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be
reflected in the image shown on the screen.
If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable].
If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will
be lower.
148
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [Select folder].
Under the [51] tab, select [Select
folder], then press <0>.
[Create folder].
2 Select
Select [Create folder], then press
<0>.
a new folder.
3 Create
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
149
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
With the folder selection screen
displayed, select a folder and press
<0>.
X The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
Subsequent captured images will be
recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.152) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The final five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the
other five characters in each name are different.
150
3 File Numbering Methods
The image files will be numbered from
0001 to 9999 in the order the images are
taken, then saved in a folder. You can
change how the file number is assigned.
1
(Example) IMG_0001.JPG
File number
Select [File numbering].
Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>.
the file numbering method.
2 Select
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Continuous
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient when
you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in
multiple cards or folders into one folder in your computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended
that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-1
Card-2
100
0051
0052
0051
101
0052
Next sequential file number
151
3 File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts from 0001 for
the new images saved. This is convenient if you want to organize images according to
cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously,
the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the
existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want to save images with the file
numbering starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-2
Card-1
100
0051
0001
0051
101
0001
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
To reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number
0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically and
the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday
and the ones taken today, for example. After the manual reset, the file numbering
returns to continuous or auto reset. (There will be no manual reset confirmation screen.)
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MOV” for movies.
152
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright information].
Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
the option to be set.
2 Select
Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
text.
3 Enter
Press the <Q> button. The text
palette will be highlighted in a color
frame, and text can be entered.
Press the <V> <U> keys to
move the yellow frame.
By selecting [
] and pressing
<0>, you can change the input
mode.
Select the desired character, then
press <0>.
You can enter up to 63 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation screen.
153
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
the setting.
4 ExitAfter
entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
X The information will be saved and the
screen will return to step 2.
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2 on the
preceding page, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright]
information.
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(provided software, p.457).
154
3 Setting the Color SpaceN
The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.
1
Select [Color space].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
the desired color space.
2 SetSelect
[sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Postprocessing of the image with computer software will therefore be
required.
If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
The ICC profile is not appended. Refer to explanations about the ICC
profile in the Software Instruction Manual PDF (p.453) on the DVD-ROM.
155
156
5
Advanced Operations
In Creative Zone modes, you
can set the shutter speed and/
or aperture to set the exposure
as desired. By changing the
camera settings, you can
obtain various results.
The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel for 4 sec. (0).
For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page
404.
Set the <R> switch downward.
157
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
the subject.
2 Focus
Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
X When focus is achieved, the focus
confirmation light <o> on the
viewfinder’s bottom right will light up
(when in One-Shot AF mode).
X The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the display.
3 Check
A standard exposure will be obtained
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture display do not blink.
the picture.
4 TakeCompose
the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
158
d: Program AE
If the “30"” shutter speed and the lower f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
If the “8000” shutter speed and the higher f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the
lens.
Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes
In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.404).
Program Shift
In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer
(0) ends (exposure setting display turns off).
Program shift cannot be used with flash.
159
s: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure suiting the brightness
of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed
can freeze the action or a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can
create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
1
Frozen action
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 SetWhile
looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> dial.
the subject.
3 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway.
X The aperture is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
As long as the aperture is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
160
s: Shutter-Priority AE
If the lower f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
If the higher f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec., “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
161
f: Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the
shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the
subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/
number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/
number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
1
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the desired aperture.
2 SetWhile
looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> dial.
the subject.
3 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway.
X The shutter speed is set
automatically.
the viewfinder display and shoot.
4 Check
As long as the shutter speed is not blinking,
a standard exposure will be obtained.
162
f: Aperture-Priority AE
If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/
number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
higher ISO speed.
If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher
aperture f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops
or set a lower ISO speed.
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.
The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as
you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button
(p.216).
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview
button is pressed.
163
a: Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the
viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This
method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2 Set the ISO speed (p.120).
speed and aperture.
3 SetTothesetshutter
the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial.
To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the
<6> or <5> dial.
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
the subject.
4 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway.
X The exposure setting will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
The exposure level mark <h>
indicates how far the current
exposure level is from the standard
exposure level.
the exposure and take the
5 Set
picture.
Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
If the exposure level exceeds ±3
stops from the standard exposure,
the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
164
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
If Auto ISO is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed
and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore, you may not
obtain the desired exposure effect.
In [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for [Disabled
in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in the
<a> and <F> modes (p.140).
When Auto ISO is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.22, 23)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.
1 Press the <q> button. (9)
the metering mode.
2 Select
While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
q: Evaluative metering
w: Partial metering
r: Spot metering
e: Center-weighted average
metering
q Evaluative metering
This is a general-purpose metering mode suited
even for backlit subjects. The camera sets the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
165
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
w Partial metering
Effective when the background is much brighter
than the subject due to backlighting, etc. The
metering is weighted at the center covering approx.
7.7% of the viewfinder area.
r Spot metering
This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or
scene. The metering is weighted at the center
covering approx. 3.0% of the viewfinder area.
e Center-weighted average metering
The metering is weighted at the center and then
averaged for the entire scene.
With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when
you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w
(Partial metering), r (Spot metering), and e (Center-weighted
average metering) modes, the exposure is set when the photo is taken.
(Pressing the shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)
When <r> is set, <z> can be displayed in the viewfinder (p.376).
166
Setting Exposure CompensationN
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the d/s/f shooting modes.
Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you
want to set the exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the
Quick Control (p.50) or follow the instructions for [z3: Expo.comp./
AEB] on the next page.
1
Increased exposure for a
brighter image
Check the exposure level indicator.
Press the shutter button halfway (0)
and check the exposure level indicator.
the exposure compensation amount.
2 SetWhile
looking at the viewfinder or
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the <5> dial.
Decreased exposure for a
darker image
the picture.
3 TakeTo cancel
the exposure
compensation, set the exposure
compensation amount back to <E>.
If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.140) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation is set.
The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can set the
<R> switch upward to prevent the exposure compensation amount
from changing accidentally.
If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
167
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
successive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
Under the [z3] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press
<0>.
the AEB range.
2 SetTurn
the <6> dial to set the AEB
AEB range
range. Press the <U> key to set
the exposure compensation amount.
Press <0> to set it.
X When you exit the menu, <h> and
the AEB range will be displayed on
the LCD panel.
3 TakeThethethreepicture.
bracketed shots will be
taken according to the drive mode set
in this sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
AEB will not be automatically
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to turn off the AEB range display.
168
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
During AEB shooting, <A> in the viewfinder and <h> on the LCD
panel will blink.
If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three
times for each shot. When <o>, <i>, or <M> is set and you hold
down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be
taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting.
When <Q> or <k> is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
AEB cannot be used with flash, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], Creative
Filters, or bulb exposures.
AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to
<2> or when the flash is ready to fire.
169
A AE LockN
Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure
metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure
setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and
take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects.
1
Focus the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
X The exposure setting will be displayed.
the <A> button. (0)
2 Press
X The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
Each time you press the <A> button,
the current autoexposure setting is
locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the <A> button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.165)
q*
wre
AF Point Selection Method (p.103-105)
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF AE lock is applied at the
point that achieved focus.
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the
center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
170
F: Bulb Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night
scenes, fireworks, astronomical objects, and other subjects requiring
long exposures.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.
the desired aperture.
2 SetWhile
looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
picture.
3 TakeThetheexposure
will continue for as long
Elapsed exposure time
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
X The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
Long exposures produce more noise than usual.
If Auto ISO is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.122).
When [z4: Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [Auto] or [Enable],
noise generated by the long exposure can be reduced (p.143).
For bulb exposures, using a tripod and a remote switch (sold separately,
p.184) is recommended.
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.184) for bulb
exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
171
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Highlight detail and shadow detail are retained for a high dynamic range
of tones even with high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for
landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured for
each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR
image is recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1
Select [HDR Mode].
Under the [z4] tab, select [HDR
Mode], then press <0>.
[Adjust dyn range].
2 SetSelect
the desired dynamic range
setting, then press <0>.
Selecting [Auto] will have the
dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image’s overall
tonal range.
The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
Only the merged HDR image will be saved. The three images used to
produce the merged HDR image will not be saved.
You cannot select RAW and RAW+JPEG. The HDR mode cannot be set
if RAW or RAW+JPEG is set.
If you set AEB, white balance bracketing, Multi Shot Noise Reduction,
multiple exposures or if you shoot bulb exposures or a movie, HDR
mode cannot be set.
The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
172
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
[Continuous HDR].
3 SetSelect
either [1 shot only] or [Every
shot], then press <0>.
With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 2 is
set to [Disable HDR].
Image Align].
4 SetFor[Auto
handheld shooting, select
[Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable], then press <0>.
picture.
5 TakeHDRtheshooting
is possible with
viewfinder shooting and Live View
shooting.
X <w> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image
will be recorded to the card.
173
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
To prevent camera shake, the ISO speed may be set higher than usual.
HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion. (HDR shooting is
possible within the range of ISO 100 - ISO 12800.)
When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.294) and Dust Delete Data (p.341) will
not be appended to the image.
If [Auto Image Align] is set to [Enable] and the HDR picture is shot
handheld, the edges of the photos will be cropped, lowering the
resolution slightly. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to
camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that
when shooting with excessively bright or dark exposure settings, auto
image alignment may not work properly.
If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [Auto Image Align] is set
to [Disable], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR
effect may be minimal. In such a case, using a tripod is recommended.
Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular colors or noise may appear.
HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural
color reproduction of the illuminated areas.
Since HDR shooting merges the images, it will take a longer time to
record the HDR image to the card than with normal shooting. During the
processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel and you cannot take another picture until the
processing is completed.
In HDR mode, the options grayed out in the camera menu cannot be set.
Note that when you set HDR mode, the Auto Lighting Optimizer, highlight
tone priority, and exposure simulation will be set to [Disable] before
shooting.
174
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. If
you shoot multiple-exposure images with Live View shooting (p.215),
you can see how the single exposures merge while shooting.
1
Select [Multiple exposure].
Under the [z4] tab, select [Multiple
exposure], then press <0>.
[Multiple exposure].
2 SetSelect
[Enable], then press <0>.
To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will
decrease greatly.
If you set white balance bracketing, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, the HDR
mode or if you shoot a movie, multiple-exposure shooting cannot be set.
If the Wi-Fi function is used, multiple-exposure shooting cannot be set.
During multiple-exposure shooting, Auto Lighting Optimizer, highlight
tone priority, peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration
correction will be disabled.
The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed
noise reduction and color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will
also be set for the subsequent exposures.
If the Picture Style is [Auto], the [Standard] Picture Style will be set for
shooting.
175
P Multiple ExposuresN
[Multi-expos ctrl].
3 SetSelect
the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
Additive
The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively. Based
on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure compensation.
Refer to the basic guide below to set a negative exposure
compensation.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
If [Additive] is set, the image displayed during shooting may look noisy.
However, when you finish shooting the set number of exposures, noise
reduction will be applied and the final multiple-exposure image will look
less noisy.
Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain a standard
exposure.
the [No. of exposures].
4 SetPress
the <V> key to select the
number of exposures, then press
<0>.
You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
176
P Multiple ExposuresN
[Continue Mult-exp].
5 SetSelect
either [1 shot only] or
[Continuously], then press <0>.
With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
With [Continuously], multipleexposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].
the first exposure.
6 Take
X The captured image will be displayed.
Remaining number
of exposures
X The <P> icon will blink.
The number of remaining exposures
is displayed in brackets [ ] in the
viewfinder or on the screen.
Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
(p.180).
subsequent exposures.
7 Shoot
X Captured images will be displayed
overlaid on previous images.
With Live View shooting, the multipleexposure images merged so far will
be displayed. By pressing the
<B> button, you can display only
the Live View image.
After you shoot the set number of
exposures, multiple-exposure
shooting will exit. With continuous
shooting, after you finish shooting the
set number of exposures while
holding down the shutter button, the
shooting will stop.
177
P Multiple ExposuresN
Only the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved. The images
taken in steps 6 and 7 for the multiple-exposure image will not be saved.
With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be. Also, as noise
increases with higher ISO speeds, shooting at low ISO speeds is
recommended.
If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple
exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up for longer than
usual.)
If you perform Live View shooting while [Additive] is set, the Live View
function will stop automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting
ends.
In step 7, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final
multiple-exposure image recorded.
If the power switch is set to <2>, the battery is replaced, or if you
switch to movie shooting after you set multiple exposure settings,
multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled.
If you switch the shooting mode to a Basic Zone mode or <w> while
shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
When multiple exposure is set or while you shoot multiple exposures,
you cannot use the functions grayed out in the camera menu.
If you connect the camera to a computer or printer, multiple-exposure
shooting is not possible.
You can press the <x> button to view the multiple exposures taken so far
or delete the last single exposure (p.180).
178
P Multiple ExposuresN
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card
You can select an image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The original of the selected image will remain intact.
You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or
JPEG images.
1
Select [Select image for multi.
expo.].
Select [Select image for multi.
expo.], then press <0>.
X The images on the card will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be used as the first single
exposure, then press <0>.
Select [OK].
X The file number of the selected image will
be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
3 TakeWhentheyoupicture.
select the first image, the
number of remaining exposures as set with
[No. of exposures] will decrease by 1.
For example, if [No. of exposures] is 3,
you can shoot two exposures.
Images shot with highlight tone priority set to [Enable] and images whose
aspect ratio is not 3:2 (p.229) cannot be selected as the first single exposure.
Auto Lighting Optimizer, peripheral illumination correction and chromatic
aberration correction will be disabled, regardless of the settings of the
1 image selected as the first single exposure.
The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, and color space,
etc. set for the first 1 image will also be set for the subsequent images.
If the first 1 image’s Picture Style is [Auto], the [Standard] Picture
Style will be set for the subsequent images.
You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
179
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single
exposure.
If you select [Deselect img], the selected image will be canceled.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
Before you finish shooting the set
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to view the merged
multiple-exposure image so far. You can
check how it looks and the exposure.
If you press the <L> button, the
operations possible during multipleexposure shooting will be displayed.
Operation
Description
2 Return to previous The operations will disappear and the screen before
screen
you pressed the <L> button will reappear.
q Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another image).
The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.
W Save and exit
The images shot so far will be merged and saved as a
multiple-exposure image.
r Exit without saving
Multiple-exposure shooting will exit without saving the
images shot.
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multipleexposure images.
180
P Multiple ExposuresN
FAQ
Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?
All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41
or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure will be a 1 image.
Image-Recording Quality Setting
Merged Multiple-Exposure
JPEG
JPEG
1
1
41/61
1
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
1+JPEG
Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.179). Note that
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?
Shooting multiple exposures is also possible with Live View shooting
(p.215). Note that [A1: Aspect ratio] will be fixed at [3:2].
Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure
shooting?
As long as [52: Auto power off] is not set to [Disable], the power
will turn off automatically after 30 min. of non-operation. If the auto
power off takes effect, multiple-exposure shooting will end, and
multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.
Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off
will take effect as set with the camera, and multiple-exposure
settings will be canceled.
181
2 Mirror LockupN
Although using the self-timer or a remote switch can prevent camera
shake, using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations (mirror shock)
can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups
(macro photography).
1 Set [Mirror lockup] to [Enable].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Mirror lockup], then press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
2 Focus the subject, then press the shutter button
completely.
XThe mirror will swing up.
3 Press the shutter button completely again.
XThe picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.
In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.
Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can scorch and
damage the shutter curtains.
If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror
lockup, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay
time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the
self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no
picture will be taken.
During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations,
etc. are disabled.
Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting, only one shot can be taken.
You can also use the self-timer with mirror lockup.
If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the
mirror again.
For mirror lockup, using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) is
recommended (p.184).
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.184). Setting the
remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.
182
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or a remote switch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the
image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.27)
attached to the camera strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece
cover is unnecessary.
1
Detach the eyecup.
Push the bottom of the eyecup to
detach.
the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
After you finish shooting, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup.
183
F Using a Remote Switch
You can connect Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) to the
camera and shoot (p.416).
For detailed instructions, refer to the remote switch’s instruction
manual.
1 Open the terminal cover.
the plug to the remote
2 Connect
control terminal.
R Remote Control Shooting
With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet
from the camera. You can either shoot immediately or
use a 2-sec. delay.
You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5.
1 Focus the subject.
the lens focus mode switch to
2 Set
<MF>.
You can also shoot with <f>.
3
184
Press the <R> button. (9)
R Remote Control Shooting
the self-timer.
4 Select
Look at the LCD panel and turn the
<6> dial to select <Q> or <k>.
the remote controller's
5 Press
transmit button.
Remote
control
sensor
Point the remote controller toward the
camera’s remote control sensor and
press the transmit button.
X The self-timer lamp lights up and the
picture is taken.
Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EX-series
Speedlite equipped with a remote-release function.
185
186
6
Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to use the built-in flash and
external Speedlites (EX-series, sold separately), how to
set flash settings with the menu, and how to use the
built-in flash for wireless flash shooting.
Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. (It will not fire.)
187
D Using the Built-in Flash
In Creative Zone modes, just press the
<D> button to raise the built-in flash for
flash photography. To retract the built-in
flash, push it back down with your fingers.
In Basic Zone modes (except <7> <3>
<5> <G> modes), the built-in flash will
be raised and fire automatically in low-light and backlit conditions.
In the <A> <C> <2> <4> <F> modes, you have the option to fire
the flash or not.
The table below shows the shutter speed and aperture settings that will
be used with flash.
Shooting Mode
Shutter Speed
A C 2 4 6 F Automatically set
d
Aperture
Automatically set
Automatically set (1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec.) Automatically set
s
Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)
f
Automatically set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.) Manually set
a
Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)
Manually set
F
The exposure will continue while you
hold down the shutter button.
Manually set
Automatically set
Flash Photography in the <f> Mode
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically
(autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture. The shutter speed
will be set automatically between 1/250 sec. - 30 sec. to suit the scene’s
brightness.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash, and the
background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically. Both the
subject and background look properly exposed (automatic slow-speed flash
sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z2: Flash control], set [Flash
sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/250-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)]
(p.196).
188
D Using the Built-in Flash
Effective Range of Built-in Flash
ISO Speed
[Approx. in meters/feet]
EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
Wide Angle: f/3.5
Telephoto: f/5.6
100
1-3.4/3.3-11.2
1-2.1/3.3-7.0
200
1-4.8/3.3-15.9
1-3.0/3.3-9.9
400
1-6.9/3.3-22.5
1-4.3/3.3-14.1
800
1.2-9.7/4.0-31.8
1-6.1/3.3-19.9
1600
1.7-13.7/5.6-45.0
1.1-8.6/3.5-28.1
3200
2.4-19.4/8.0-63.6
1.5-12.1/5.0-39.8
6400
3.4-27.4/11.2-90.0
2.1-17.1/7.0-56.2
12800
4.8-38.8/15.9-127.3
3.0-24.2/9.9-79.5
H (25600)
6.9-54.9/22.5-180.0
4.3-34.3/14.1-112.5
When you use the built-in flash, detach any lens hood and keep at least
1 meter/3.3 feet away from the subject.
If the lens has a hood attached or if you are too close to the subject, the
bottom of the picture might look dark due to the obstructed flash.
If you use a super telephoto lens or large-aperture lens and the bottom of
the picture looks dark, using an external Speedlite (sold separately, p.193) is
recommended.
189
D Using the Built-in Flash
3 Red-eye Reduction
Using the red-eye reduction lamp before flash photography can reduce
red eye.
Red-eye reduction will function in any shooting mode except <7>,
<3>, <5>, and <G>.
1
Select [Red-eye reduc.].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Red-eye
reduc.], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
For flash photography, when you
press the shutter button halfway, the
red-eye reduction lamp will light up.
The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at
the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are
close to the subject.
When you press the shutter button halfway, the scale
display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and
turn off. For best results, take the picture after this
scale display turns off.
The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.
y Flash Exposure CompensationN
Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject
does not come out as desired. You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
1
190
Press the <Q> button. (7)
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
D Using the Built-in Flash
[y].
2 Select
Press the <V> <U> keys to
select [y*], then press <0>.
X The flash exposure compensation
screen will appear.
the exposure compensation
3 Set
amount.
To make the flash exposure brighter,
turn the <5> or <6> dial to the
right (increased exposure).
To make it darker, turn the <5> or
<6> dial to the left (decreased
exposure).
X When you press the shutter button
halfway, the <y> icon will appear in
the viewfinder.
After taking the picture, follow steps 1
to 3 and set the flash exposure
compensation amount to 0.
If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.140) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased flash exposure
compensation is set.
If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite (sold
separately, p.193), you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with
the camera (Quick Control or External flash function settings). If it is set
with both the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the
camera’s.
The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash
settings] in [z2: Flash control] (p.195).
The camera can also be used to set the external Speedlite’s flash
exposure compensation in the same way as with the built-in flash.
191
D Using the Built-in Flash
A FE LockN
FE (flash exposure) lock obtains and locks the appropriate flash
exposure for the desired part of the subject as framed.
1
Press the <D> button.
X The built-in flash will rise.
Press the shutter button halfway and
look in the viewfinder to check that
the <D> icon is lit.
2 Focus the subject.
the <A> button. (8)
3 Press
Aim the viewfinder center over the
subject where you want to lock the flash
exposure, then press the <A> button.
X The flash will fire a preflash and the
required flash output is calculated
and retained in memory.
X In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed
for a moment and <d> will light up.
Each time you press the <A> button, a
preflash is fired and the required flash
output is calculated and retained in memory.
the picture.
4 TakeCompose
the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
X The flash is fired when the picture is
taken.
If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash,
the <D> icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.
FE lock is not possible with Live View shooting.
192
D Using an External Speedlite
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Flash photography with EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is as easy
as with built-in flash.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s
menu, see pages 195-202.
Shoe-mount Speedlites
Macro Lites
Flash exposure compensation
Set it with the Quick Control screen (p.50) or [External flash func.
setting] under [z2: Flash control] (p.199). With the Quick Control
screen, you can set flash exposure compensation in the same way
as for the built-in flash. See page 190.
FE lock
Set this in the same way as for the built-in flash. See steps 2 to 4 on
the preceding page.
When it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated,
external Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam when
necessary.
193
D Using an External Speedlite
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Using Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at
1/250 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, be sure to
test the flash synchronization before shooting with the sync speed set
within approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec., since the flash duration of such
units is longer than that of compact flash units and vary depending on
the models.
Cautions for Live View Shooting
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [A2:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.231). The flash will not fire if it is set to
[Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.
194
3 Setting the FlashN
With the built-in flash or an EX-series Speedlite compatible with flash
function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to set flash
functions and the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions. If you use an
external Speedlite, attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on
the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
For details on the external Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the
Speedlite’s instruction manual.
1
Select [Flash control].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
X The Flash control screen will appear.
the desired option.
2 Select
Select the option to be set, then press
<0>.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam, set [Disable].
E-TTL II Flash Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the
flash exposure will be averaged for the
entire metered scene. Flash exposure
compensation may be necessary. This
setting is for advanced users.
195
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Synchronization Speed in Av Mode
You can set the flash sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE (f) mode.
: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/250
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.
: 1/250-1/60 sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.
: 1/250 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/250 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/250-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/250-1/60sec. auto].
If [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not
possible in the <f> mode with the external Speedlite.
196
3 Setting the FlashN
Built-in Flash Settings
Flash mode
Normally, set this to [E-TTL II]. This
enables autoexposure shooting with the
built-in flash.
To set the flash output level manually,
select [Manual flash].
Select [2flash output], then set the
flash output level to within 1/1 - 1/128
(1/3-stop increments) before shooting.
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that
the flash fires immediately after the
exposure starts.
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter closes.
When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail
of light such as from car headlights at night. With second-curtain
synchronization, two flashes will be fired: once when you press the
shutter button completely, and once immediately before the exposure
ends.
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be used automatically even if [2nd curtain] is set.
197
3 Setting the FlashN
2 Flash exposure compensation
The same setting as step 3 in “Flash
Exposure Compensation” on page 190
can be set.
Wireless functions
With wireless flash photography (via
optical transmission), you can use the
built-in flash to control an external
Speedlite.
For details, see “Using Wireless Flash”
on page 203.
198
3 Setting the FlashN
External Flash Function Settings
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
external Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom
Function settings, etc.
For details on your Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
Sample display
Wireless functions
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites for
automatic flash shooting.
The [Manual flash] mode is for setting
the Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.
199
3 Setting the FlashN
Wireless functions
Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is
possible with radio or optical
transmission. For details on wireless
flash, refer to the instruction manual of a
Speedlite compatible with the wireless
flash shooting.
Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will fire right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter
speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at
night. With second-curtain synchronization, two flashes will be fired:
once when you press the shutter button completely, and once
immediately before the exposure ends.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all
shutter speeds. This is especially effective for portraits using fill flash
when you want to give priority to the aperture setting.
200
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash exposure compensation
The same setting as step 3 in “Flash
Exposure Compensation” on page 190
can be set.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
Flash exposure bracketing
While the flash output is changed
automatically, three shots are taken.
For details, refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite compatible with
flash exposure bracketing.
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,
you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and
[Flash exposure compensation] under [External flash func. setting].
([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite, you
cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera (Quick
Control or External flash function settings). If it is set with both the
camera and external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the
camera’s.
201
3 Setting the FlashN
External Speedlite Custom Function Settings
For details on the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the
Speedlite’s instruction manual.
1
Select [External flash C.Fn
setting].
Select [External flash C.Fn setting],
then press <0>.
the desired function.
2 SetPress
the <U> key to select the
number, then press <0>.
Select the setting, then press <0>.
Clear Settings
1
Select [Clear settings].
Select [Clear settings], then press
<0>.
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
Select [Clear built-in flash set.],
[Clear external flash set.], or [Clear
ext. flash C.Fn set.], then press
<0>.
When you select [OK], the respective
flash settings or all the Custom
Function settings will be cleared.
With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [Flash metering mode] Custom
Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always fire at full
output.
The Speedlite’s Personal Functions (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled with
the camera’s [Flash control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.
202
Using Wireless FlashN
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit with Canon
Speedlites with a wireless slave feature via optical transmission and
wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.
Be sure to read about wireless flash photography (optical transmission)
in the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Slave Unit Settings and Position
Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and
set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave
unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of Canon
Speedlite slave units can be used and controlled together.
(1) Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit.
(2) Set the external Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same
channel as set on the camera.*1
(3) If you want to set the flash ratio (p.210), set the slave unit ID.
(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown
below.
(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2
Example of Wireless Flash Set-up
Indoors
Approx.
10 m
(32.8 ft.)
Outdoors
Approx.
7m
Approx. (23.0 ft.)
80°
Approx. 5 m
(16.4 ft.)
Approx. 7 m
(23.0 ft.)
203
Using Wireless FlashN
*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, the
camera can work with any channel.
*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face
the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be
received by the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed flash
head and wireless sensor, take pictures to make sure it can fire.
Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off
To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s <A>
button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test
firing button to cancel the auto power off.
The camera’s master unit function cannot be used for wireless flash
shooting with radio transmission.
204
Using Wireless FlashN
Wireless Flash Shooting Configurations
The table below shows the possible configurations for wireless flash
shooting. Choose the configuration suiting the subject, shooting
conditions, and the number of external Speedlites you use.
External Speedlite
A:B Flash
Quantity
Ratio
Built-in
Page
Flash
Setting
Wireless
Firing Group
Functions
Single
-
-
p.206
0
Single
-
Used
p.208
0:3
-
Multiple
-
-
p.209
0
1 All
Set
-
p.210
-
Used
Set
Used
Fully
Multiple
Automatic
(E-TTL II Multiple
autoflash) Multiple
• Flash exposure
compensation
p.211
1 All
0
1(A:B)
0+3
1 All and 2
0+3
1(A:B)2
p.212
• FE lock
External Speedlite
Manual
Flash
Built-in
Page
Flash
Quantity
A:B Flash
Ratio
Single/
Multiple
-
-
Multiple
Set
-
p.213
Setting
Wireless
Firing Group
Functions
0
1 All
0
1(A:B)
Single/
Multiple
-
Used
0+3
1 All and 2
Multiple
Set
Used
0+3
1(A:B)2
Even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it will still fire to
control the slave unit. The flash fired to control the slave unit may
therefore appear in the picture depending on the shooting conditions.
205
Using Wireless FlashN
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
This shows the most basic setup for
fully-automatic wireless flash shooting
with one external Speedlite.
Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all
wireless flash shooting. Therefore,
these steps are omitted in the other
wireless flash setups explained on
the pages hereafter.
On the menu screens, the <0> and
<1> icons refer to the external
Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>
icons refer to the built-in flash.
1
Press the <I> button to raise the
built-in flash.
For wireless flash shooting, be sure
to raise the built-in flash.
[Flash control].
2 Select
Under the [z2] tab, select [Flash
control].
[Built-in flash settings].
3 Select
Select [Built-in flash settings].
206
Using Wireless FlashN
mode: E-TTL II].
4 SetSet[Flash
[Flash mode] to [E-TTL II].
func.:0].
5 SetSet[Wireless
[Wireless func.] to [0].
6 SetSet[Channel].
the channel (1-4) to the same one
as the slave unit.
group:1All].
7 SetSet[Firing
[Firing group] to [1All].
picture.
8 TakeSetthe
the camera and take the picture
in the same way as with normal flash
shooting.
To terminate wireless flash shooting,
set [Wireless func.] to [Disable].
Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.
Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.
207
Using Wireless FlashN
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
and the Built-in Flash
This is fully automatic wireless flash
shooting with one external Speedlite and
the built-in flash.
You can change the flash ratio between
the external Speedlite and built-in flash
to adjust how the shadows look on the
subject.
1
Set [Wireless func.] to [0:3].
In step 5 on page 207, set [Wireless
func.] to [0:3].
the desired flash ratio and
2 Set
take the picture.
Select [1:2] and set the flash ratio
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio
to the right of 1:1 is not possible.
If the built-in flash output is not enough, set a higher ISO speed (p.120).
The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop
increments).
208
Using Wireless FlashN
Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or
separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple
Speedlites.
Basic settings:
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
Wireless func. :0
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
[1All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit
This is convenient when you need a
large flash output. All the slave units will
fire at the same output and be controlled
to obtain a standard exposure.
No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or
C), all the slave units will fire as one
group.
1 Set [Firing group:1All].
2 Take the picture.
209
Using Wireless FlashN
[1 (A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups
A
B
1
Divide the slave units into Groups A and
B and change the flash ratio to obtain
the desired lighting effect.
Refer to your Speedlite’s instruction
manual to set one slave unit’s slave ID
to A (Group A) and the other slave unit’s
ID to B (Group B) and position them as
shown in the illustration.
Set [Firing group] to [1 (A:B)].
the desired flash ratio and
2 Set
take the picture.
Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the
flash ratio.
If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], Speedlites with slave ID:C (Group C)
will not fire.
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2stop increments).
210
Using Wireless FlashN
Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and
Multiple External Speedlites
The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained
on pages 209-210.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.
1
Basic settings:
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
Wireless func. :0+3
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
[Firing group].
2 SetSelect
[1All and 2] or
[1(A:B)2].
With [1(A:B)2], set the A:B flash
ratio and shoot.
A
[1 All and 2]
B
[1(A:B)2]
211
Using Wireless FlashN
Creative Wireless Flash Shooting
Flash exposure compensation
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure
compensation can be set. The flash exposure compensation
settings that can be set (see below) will differ depending on the
[Wireless func.] and [Firing group] settings.
Flash exposure compensation
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to the built-in flash and all the
external Speedlites.
2 exp. comp.
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to the built-in flash.
1 exp. comp.
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to all the external Speedlites.
FE lock
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to
perform FE lock (p.192).
212
Using Wireless FlashN
Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash
Shooting
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], flash exposure can be set
manually. The flash output settings that can be set ([1 flash output],
[Group A output], etc.) will differ depending on the [Wireless func.]
setting (see below).
Wireless func.: 0
Firing group: 1All
The manual flash output setting will
be applied to all the external
Speedlites.
Firing group: 1(A:B)
You can divide the slave units into
Groups A and B and set the flash
output separately for each group.
Wireless func.: 0+3
Firing group: 1All and 2
You can set the flash output
separately for the external
Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.
Firing group: 1(A:B)2
You can divide the slave units into
Groups A and B and set the flash
output separately for each group. You
can also set the flash output for the
built-in flash.
213
214
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the
picture on the camera’s LCD
monitor. This is called “Live View
shooting”.
Live View shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <A>.
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
To shoot while handholding the camera, see page 76.
Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (provided software, p.457) installed in your
computer, you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot
remotely while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to
the Software Instruction Manual PDF (p.453) on the DVD-ROM.
215
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.
The Live View image will closely reflect the
brightness level of the actual image you capture.
the subject.
3 Focus
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.233).
the picture.
4 TakePress
the shutter button completely.
X The picture will be taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
X After the image review ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting.
The image’s field of view is approx. 99% (with the image-recording
quality set to JPEG 73).
In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to subsequent shots.
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.184) for Live View shooting.
216
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [A1: Live View shoot.] to
[Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
Approx. 230 shots
Approx. 210 shots
50% Flash Use
Approx. 210 shots
Approx. 200 shots
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6 and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, continuous Live View shooting is
possible for approx. 1 hr. 50 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F).
In the <F> and <G> modes, the shooting area will be smaller.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 249-250.
You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the
shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder
shooting.
If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.59). If [52:
Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).
With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately) or stereo AV cable AVCDC400ST (sold separately), you can display the Live View image on a
TV screen (p.316, 319).
217
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Information Display
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
AF method
•c : u+Tracking
•o : FlexiZone - Multi
•d : FlexiZone - Single
•f : Quick mode
Possible shots
Maximum burst/Number of remaining multiple exposures
Battery check
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Histogram
Quick control
White balance
Shooting mode
Drive mode
Picture Style
Metering mode
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Image-recording
quality
Creative filters
HDR shooting/
Multiple exposures/
Multi Shot Noise
Reduction
Switch to auto
selection
(AF point)
Wi-Fi function
Exposure
simulation
Magnified view
AEB/FEB
Touch shutter
ISO speed
AE lock
Flash ready/Flash off
Shutter speed
Flash exposure
compensation
Aperture
Eye-Fi card transmission status
218
Highlight tone priority
Wi-Fi transmission status
GPS connection indicator
Exposure level indicator/AEB range
Digital compass
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. The use of a tripod is recommended for people with circulation
problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot
places.
The histogram can be displayed when [A1: Expo. simulation: Enable]
(p.230) is set.
You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.65). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera
is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot
be displayed.
When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of lowor bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that noise may be more noticeable than the
actual image recorded.
If the <F> or <G> mode is set, Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, or
bulb or flash is used, the <g> icon and histogram will be grayed out
(for your reference). The histogram may not be properly displayed in lowor bright-light conditions.
219
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene
type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or
shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Portrait*1
Non-portrait
Nature and
Movement
Movement Close*2
Outdoor Scene
Background
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod
Dark blue
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark,
it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
220
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S 55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
• EF 300mm f/2.8L IS II USM • EF 400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.
*4+*5:If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation reflects the settings of the Picture Style,
white balance and other functions in the Live View image so you can
see what the captured image will look like.
The Live View image will automatically reflect the effects of the settings
listed below.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Creative filters
Ambience-based shots
Lighting/scene based shots
Metering mode
Exposure (with [A1: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (image area confirmation)
221
Shooting Function Settings
f / R / i / q / B Settings
While the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <f>,
<R>, <i>, or <q> button, the setting screen will appear on the
LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the
respective shooting function.
When the Quick mode is set, you can press the <B> button to select
the AF area selection mode. With single-point AF (manual selection)
and Zone AF, you can use <6>, <5>, or <9> to select an AF point
or zone.
When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering
circle will be displayed in the center.
During Live View shooting, the exposure is set at the moment the picture
is taken, regardless of the metering mode.
222
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In Creative Zone modes, you can set the AF method, Drive mode,
Metering mode, Image-recording quality, White balance, Picture
Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and Creative Filters.
In Basic Zone modes (except <F> and <G>), you can set the
functions in bold and the settings shown in the table on page 91.
Press the <Q> button. (7)
X The settable functions will be
displayed.
1
a function and set it.
2 Select
Press the <V> key to select a
function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.69) will appear.
Set it by pressing the <U> key.
In the <8> mode, select the
shooting mode option on the upper
left of the screen, then press <0> to
select the shooting mode.
To set the RAW image-recording
quality or Picture Style parameters,
press the <B> button.
the setting.
3 ExitPress
<0> to finalize the setting and
return to Live View shooting.
223
U Shooting with Filter Effects
While viewing the Live View image, you can apply a filter effect (Grainy
B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect, Water painting effect,
Toy camera effect, or Miniature effect) before shooting. These are
called Creative filters.
When you take the picture, the camera saves only the image with the
Creative filter applied. If you also want to save the image without a
Creative filter applied, take the picture without a Creative filter. Then
apply a Creative filter effect and save it as a new image (p.335).
any shooting mode except <F>
1 orSet<G>.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
X Quick Control will appear.
[ ].
3 Select
Press the <V> key to select [ ]
(Creative filters) on the screen’s right
side.
a filter.
4 Select
Press the <U> key to select the
desired filter effect (p.226).
X The image will be displayed with the
selected filter applied.
224
U Shooting with Filter Effects
the filter effect.
5 Adjust
Press the <B> button (except for
the Miniature effect).
Press the <U> key to adjust the
filter effect, then press <0>.
For the Miniature effect, press <0>,
then press the <V> key to move the
white frame over the area you want
the image look sharp.
the picture.
6 Take
X The image is shot with the filter
applied.
When you set a Creative filter, single shooting will take effect even if the
drive mode has been set to <o>, <i>, or <M>.
You cannot use a Creative filter if the recording quality is RAW+JPEG or
RAW, or if you have set AEB, white balance bracketing, or Multi Shot
Noise Reduction.
The histogram is not displayed when you shoot with Creative filters.
225
U Shooting with Filter Effects
Creative Filter Characteristics
Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect
expands the image center, the image resolution at the center may
decrease depending on the recording quality. Set the filter while
checking how the image looks. The AF method will be set to
FlexiZone - Single (fixed at center) or Quick mode (fixed at center).
Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look threedimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note that
the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered with a
smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes
may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular
or have significant noise.
226
U Shooting with Filter Effects
Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it
look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast
by adjusting the color tone.
Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 5, you can switch the horizontal/vertical orientation of
the white frame by pressing the <u> button (or tapping [ ] on the
screen). The AF method will be FlexiZone - Single to focus at the
center of the white frame.
With Grainy B/W, the grainy look displayed on the LCD monitor will be
different from the actual image.
With the Soft focus and Miniature effects, the blur effect displayed on the
LCD monitor may not look the same as the actual image. By pressing the
depth-of-field preview button, you can check the image’s blur effect
(Creative Zone modes only).
227
3 Menu Function Settings
A1
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <A>, the Live
View shooting menu options will appear
under the [A1] and [A2] tabs.
In Basic Zone modes, the [A2] tab and
certain options under the [A1] tab will
not appear.
The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View
shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings
become invalid).
Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
AF method
You can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], [FlexiZone Single] or [Quick mode]. See pages 233-244 for the AF method.
Continuous AF
The default setting is [Enable].
The camera attains rough focus of the subject continuously. This
makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press the shutter button
halfway. If [Enable] is set, the lens will operate constantly and
consume more battery power. This will reduce the number of
possible shots (battery life). Also, if the AF method is set to [Quick
mode], Continuous AF will be automatically set to [Disable]. If you
select another AF method, Continuous AF will revert to the original
setting.
If you want to set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> during
Continuous AF, first stop Live View shooting.
228
3 Menu Function Settings
Touch Shutter
Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically. For details, see page 245.
Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you align the
intersections over the subject for better balance in the composition.
Aspect ratioM
The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].
The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when
the following aspect ratios are set: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].
JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. RAW images
will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since the aspect
ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the image can be
generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the RAW
image with the camera and the provided software.
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
5472x3648
4864x3648
5472x3072*
3648x3648
3/1
(20.0 megapixels) (17.7 megapixels) (16.8 megapixels) (13.3 megapixels)
3648x2432
3248x2432*
3648x2048*
2432x2432
4
(8.9 megapixels) (7.9 megapixels) (7.5 megapixels) (5.9 megapixels)
4104x2736
3648x2736
4104x2310*
2736x2736
41
(11.2 megapixels) (10.0 megapixels) (9.5 megapixels) (7.5 megapixels)
2736x1824
2432x1824
2736x1536*
1824x1824
a/61
(5.0 megapixels) (4.4 megapixels) (4.2 megapixels) (3.3 megapixels)
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
b
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
c
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels)
(290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
Image
Quality
229
3 Menu Function Settings
The asterisked image-recording quality settings do not match the
respective aspect ratio exactly.
The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly larger
than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor
when shooting.
If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this
camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.
Exposure simulationN
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness of
the actual image (exposure) will look.
・ Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
・ During e (E/g)
Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to
make the Live View image easy to see. The image will be
displayed close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting
image only while you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.
・ Disable (E)
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live
View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation,
the image is displayed at the standard brightness.
230
3 Menu Function Settings
A2 N
Silent LV shootingN
• Mode 1
The shooting operation noise is quieter than with normal shooting.
Continuous shooting is also possible. If <o> is set, you can
shoot at a maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 7.0 fps.
• Mode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will
be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the
camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the
shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will
resume. The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if
continuous shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.
• Disable
Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens (other than
those listed in
below) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you
use an Extension tube. If [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] is set, the standard
exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result.
If you use flash, silent shooting will not be possible regardless of the
[Silent LV shoot.] setting.
When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not
fire if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
If [Mode 2] is set and you use a Remote Controller (p.184), the operation
will be the same as with [Mode 1].
With the TS-E 17mm f/4L or TS-E 24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
231
3 Menu Function Settings
Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Performing any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting. To
start Live View shooting again, press the <0> button.
• Selecting [z4: Dust Delete Data], [54: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear
all camera settings], or [54: z firmware ver.].
• Changing the shooting mode (example: Basic Zone modes ↔ Creative
Zone modes).
232
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Changes in AF Speed Depending On the AF Control Method
If the AF method is set to [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone
- Single] for Live View shooting or movie shooting, the AF control method
(phase-difference detection with the image sensor or contrast detection) will
switch automatically depending on the lens used and functions selected, such
as movie digital zoom or magnified view. This can greatly affect the AF speed
and the camera may take a longer time to focus (phase-difference detection
generally allows faster AF focusing). For details, refer to Canon’s website.
Selecting the AF Method
You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your
subject. The following AF methods are provided: [u(face)+Tracking],
[FlexiZone - Multi] (p.236), [FlexiZone - Single] (p.238), and [Quick
mode] (p.243).
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.247).
Select the AF method.
Under the [A1] tab, select [AF
method].
Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
While the Live View image is
displayed, you can also press the
<f> button to select the AF method
on the setting screen.
u(face)+Tracking:c
The camera detects and focuses human faces. If a face moves, the AF
point <p> also moves to track the face.
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
233
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
an AF point.
2 Select
When a face is detected, the <p>
frame will appear over the face to be
focused.
If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use <9> to move
the <q> frame over the face you
want to focus on.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to select the face or subject. If
the subject is not a face, < > will be
displayed.
If no faces can be detected, or if you
tap the LCD monitor but do not select
any face or subject, the camera will
switch to [FlexiZone - Multi] with
automatic selection (p.236).
the subject.
3 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.216).
234
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. You can prevent this by setting [Continuous AF] to [Enable].
An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
The <p> may cover only part of the face.
You can press <0> or the <L> button to display the AF point < > at
the center and use <9> to move the AF point.
Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the
picture, the <p> will be grayed out. If you press the shutter button
halfway, the subject will be focused in FlexiZone - Multi method with
automatic selection.
235
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Multi:o
You can focus over a wide area with up to 31 AF points (automatic
selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing
(zone selection).
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
Area frame
the AF point. N
2 Select
Pressing <0> or the <L> button
will toggle between automatic
selection and zone selection. In Basic
Zone modes, automatic selection is
set automatically.
Use <9> to select the zone. To
return to the center zone, press <0>
or the <L> button again.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to select a zone.
236
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the subject.
3 Focus
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the area
frame will turn orange.
the picture.
4 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.216).
If the camera does not focus the desired target subject with automatic AF
point selection, switch the AF method to zone selection or [FlexiZone Single] and refocus.
Depending on the [A1: Aspect ratio], the number of AF points will
differ. At [3:2], there will be 31 AF points. At [4:3] and [1:1], there will be
25 AF points. And at [16:9], 21 AF points. Also, at [16:9], there will be
only three zones.
For movie shooting, there will be 21 AF points (or 25 AF points if
[640x480] is set) and three zones (or 9 zones if [640x480] is set).
237
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Single: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus a particular subject.
the Live View image.
1 Display
Press the <0> button.
AF point
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
X The AF point < > will appear.
During movie shooting, if [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF
point will be displayed in a larger size.
the AF point.
2 Move
Use <9> to move the AF point to
where you want to focus. (It cannot
be moved to the edge of the screen.)
To return the AF point to the center,
press <0> or <L> button.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to move the AF point.
the subject.
3 Focus
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
238
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the picture.
4 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.216).
239
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Notes for u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single
AF Operation
Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button
halfway will focus again.
The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source.
When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set and you press the <u> button (or
tap < > on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or image
center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you press the
shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal and the
camera will focus.
When [FlexiZone - Single] is set and you press the <u> button (or
tap < > on the screen), the area covered by the AF point will be
magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus while in
magnified view. This is effective when the camera is attached to a
tripod and you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing is
difficult in magnified view, return to the normal display and use AF.
Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and
magnified views.
If you magnify the view after focusing with [FlexiZone - Multi] or
[FlexiZone - Single] in the normal view, precise focus may not be
achieved.
If [u+Tracking] is set, magnified view is not possible.
With certain types of lenses, the AF control method (phase-difference
detection with the image sensor or contrast detection) will switch
automatically. The AF speed may therefore change greatly and focusing
may take longer.
When in magnified view, contrast-detection AF will be used regardless of
the lens used. The AF speed will therefore become slow.
When in magnified view, Continuous AF (p.228) will not be executed.
240
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces
or when highlight or shadow details are lost.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
Subjects with repetitive patterns (skyscraper windows, computer
keyboards, etc.).
Fine lines and subject outlines.
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
Night scenes or points of light.
Under fluorescent or LED light sources and when the image flickers.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the picture.
Subjects strongly reflecting light.
The AF point covers both near and distant subjects (such as an
animal in a cage).
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
Autofocusing while the subject is very far out of focus.
Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
A special effect filter is used.
Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
241
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
If you cannot achieve focus under the shooting conditions listed on the
preceding page, set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus
manually.
If you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the
center AF point or zone over the subject to focus, focus again, and then
take the picture.
The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series
Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED
light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
During magnified view, camera shake may make it harder to achieve
focus. Using a tripod is recommended.
242
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Quick Mode: f
The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One-Shot AF mode
(p.100), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.
Although you can focus the target area quickly, the Live View image
will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.
In AF area selection modes other than 19-point automatic selection AF,
you can manually select the AF point. In Basic Zone modes, 19-point
automatic selection AF is set automatically.
Area AF frame
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
If the AF area selection mode is set to
19-point automatic selection AF, the
Area AF frame will be displayed.
With FlexiZone - Single (manual
selection), the AF point will be
displayed as a small frame.
With Zone AF (manual zone
selection), the frame indicating the
zone is displayed.
the AF area selection
2 Select
mode and AF point. N
Press the <B> button to display the
current AF area selection mode.
Each time you press the <B> button,
the AF area selection mode changes.
When the AF area selection mode is
FlexiZone - Single (manual selection)
or Zone AF (manual zone selection),
you can select the AF point (or zone).
243
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
The AF point (or zone) selection will
change in the direction you tilt <9>.
If you press <0>, the center AF
point (or center Zone) will be
selected.
You can also use the <6> and
<5> dials to select the AF point.
the subject.
3 Focus
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X The Live View image will turn off, the
reflex mirror will go back down, and AF
will be executed. (No picture is taken.)
X When focus is achieved, the beeper
will sound and the Live View image
will reappear.
X The AF point used to focus will light
up in green.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will blink in orange.
the picture.
4 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.216).
When [Quick mode] is set, [Continuous AF] will automatically be set to
[Disable].
Quick mode cannot be set for movie shooting.
You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture while the
Live View image is displayed.
244
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically. This works in all shooting modes.
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
the touch shutter.
2 Enable
Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
Each time you tap the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
[x] (Touch shutter: Enable)
You can focus and shoot by tapping
the screen.
[y] (Touch shutter: Disable)
You can select where you want to
focus by tapping the screen. Then
you press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
to shoot.
3 TapTapthethescreen
face or subject on the screen.
X At the point you tap, the camera will
focus in the AF method that was set
(p.233-244).
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
turns green and the picture is taken
automatically.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange. Tap the face or
subject on the screen again.
245
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Even if <o>, <i>, or <M> is set, single shooting will take effect.
The touch shutter does not function during magnified view.
When [V Shutter butt. half-press] is set to [Metering start] or [AE
lock (while button pressed)] under [8 C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls],
autofocusing does not take effect.
You can also set the touch shutter with [A1: Touch shutter].
To take a bulb exposure, tap the screen twice. The first tap on the screen
will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the exposure. Be
careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.
246
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the magnifying frame.
2 Display
Press the <u> button.
X The magnifying frame will appear.
You can also tap [u] on the screen to
magnify the image.
Magnifying frame
the magnifying frame.
3 Move
Press <9> to move the magnifying
frame to the position where you want
to focus. You can also tap it to move
it.
To return the magnifying frame to the
center, press <0> or <L> button.
the image.
4 Magnify
Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification within the frame will
change as follows:
1x 9 5x 9 10x 9 Normal view
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification
While in magnified view, you can use
<9> to scroll around in magnified
view.
247
MF: Focusing Manually
manually.
5 Focus
While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
the picture.
6 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.216).
248
Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. You should exit Live View shooting and allow the camera’s
internal temperature to cool before shooting again.
The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, turn off the camera.
If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the image quality of high ISO
speed images or long exposures may deteriorate even before the white
<s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Result
If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out
as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. In
magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
orange. Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be
captured in the normal view range.
If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.140) is set to other than [Disable],
the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation
or decreased flash exposure compensation is set.
249
Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View
image is different from that of the recorded image.)
If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume shooting
under the actual light source.
If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
During Live View shooting, some Custom Function settings will not take
effect (p.363).
Lens and Flash
The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode,
available since the second half of 2011.
FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling
flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.
250
8
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <k>.
The movie recording format will
be MOV.
For cards that can record movies, see page 3.
If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is
recommended.
To shoot while handholding the camera, see page 76.
If [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], movie shooting is not possible.
Before shooting movies, set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable].
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with HighDefinition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
251
k Shooting Movies
Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to other than <a>, autoexposure
control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
the shooting mode to a mode
1 Set
other than <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
the subject.
3 Focus
Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.233-248).
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
the movie.
4 Shoot
Press the <0> button to start
Recording movies
Microphone
252
shooting a movie.
X While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
To stop shooting the movie, press the
<0> button again.
k Shooting Movies
In Basic Zone modes, the shooting result will be the same as in the
<A> mode. Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.255).
In the <s>, <f>, or <F> shooting modes, the settings will be the
same as in the <d> mode.
Settable menu functions will differ between Basic Zone modes and
Creative Zone modes (p.415).
In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A> button (p.170) to lock
the exposure (AE lock). The exposure setting will be displayed for the
time length set with [Z1: Metering timer]. After applying AE lock
during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button.
(AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S> button.)
In Creative Zone modes, you can set exposure compensation by sliding
the <R> switch downward and turning the <5> dial.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed and shutter
speed at the screen bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a still
photo (p.258). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not displayed.
Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for
still photo shooting.
If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture
will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).
253
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in Basic Zone Modes
The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
ISO Speed in the d, s, f, and F Mode
The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
Under [z3: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO speed range]’s
[Maximum] setting to [12800/H] (p.123), the maximum ISO speed
for the automatic ISO speed setting will be expanded to H
(equivalent to ISO 12800). Be aware that if you set [Maximum] to
[12800], the maximum ISO speed will not be expanded and remains
ISO 6400.
If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.145), the ISO
speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400.
Under [z3: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] cannot be set (p.124, 125) for movie shooting.
Under [ISO speed range], if [Maximum] is set to [H (25600)] and you
switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the maximum ISO speed
for the automatic ISO range during movie shooting will be H (equivalent to
ISO 12800). It cannot be expanded to ISO 25600.
Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately)
Equipped with an LED Light
With autoexposure (modes other than a) movie shooting, the camera
will automatically turn on the Speedlite’s LED light under low-light
conditions. For details, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction
manual.
254
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be
adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Non-Portrait
Portrait*1
Background
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Close*2
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
255
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the ISO speed.
3 SetPress
the <i> button.
X The ISO speed setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor.
Turn the <6> dial to set the ISO speed.
For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
the shutter speed and
4 Set
aperture.
Shutter speed
Aperture
Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter speeds
depend on the frame rate <9>.
•6 5 4 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
•8 7
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the
<6> or <5> dial.
and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.252).
256
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed During Manual Exposure Shooting
With [Auto] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 6400. Under [z3: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO
speed range]’s [Maximum] setting to [12800/H] (p.123), the
maximum ISO speed will be expanded and the ISO speed will be set
automatically within ISO 100 to H (equivalent to ISO 12800).
You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 in 1/3-stop
increments. Under [z3: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO speed
range]’s [Maximum] setting to [12800/H], the maximum ISO speed for
the manual ISO speed setting will be expanded to H (equivalent to ISO
12800). Be aware that when you set [Maximum] to [12800], the maximum
ISO speed will not be expanded and remains ISO 6400.
If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.145), the ISO
speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400 (depending on the [ISO speed
range] setting).
Under [z3: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] cannot be set (p.124, 125) for movie shooting.
Since shooting a movie at ISO 8000/10000/12800 may result in much
noise, it is designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as [H]).
Under [ISO speed range], if [Maximum] is set to [H (25600)] and you
switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the maximum ISO
speed for the manual ISO range during movie shooting will be H
(equivalent to ISO 12800). It cannot be expanded to ISO 25600.
Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
When Auto ISO is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.22, 258)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
257
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
AF method
•c : u + Tracking
•o: FlexiZone - Multi
•d : FlexiZone - Single
Movie shooting mode
: Autoexposure
(Basic Zone modes)
: Autoexposure
(Creative Zone
modes)
: Manual exposure
Drive mode
Possible shots
Maximum burst
Movie shooting remaining time*/
Elapsed time
Battery check
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Quick Control
White balance
Picture Style
Movie recording size
Video snapshot
Compression method
Digital zoom
Wi-Fi transmission
status
Exposure mode
L: Autoexposure
K: Manual
exposure
Recording level:
Manual
Movie Servo AF
Frame rate
AE lock
LED light
Shutter speed
Image-recording quality
Level meter
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Aperture
Digital compass
Magnify/Digital zoom
Attenuator
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Wind filter
Wi-Fi function
Exposure level indicator
GPS connection indicator
* Applies to a single movie clip.
You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button (p.65).
Note that if the AF method is set to [u +Tracking] or the camera is
connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.316), the electronic level
cannot be displayed.
When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
258
k Shooting Movies
Notes on Movie Shooting
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. The use of a tripod is recommended for people with circulation
problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
If <Q> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie
shooting, the white balance may also change.
If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may
flicker.
Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended. Zooming
the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the
lens’ maximum aperture changes or not. Exposure changes may be
recorded as a result.
During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press
the <u> button.
Be careful not to cover the microphone (p.252) with your finger, etc.
Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 287 and 288.
If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages
249 and 250.
Movie-related settings are under the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs (p.273).
A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent 4 GB.
The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording
size set to [A]).
You can also focus the image by pressing the <p> button.
To focus during movie shooting, press the <p> button. You cannot
focus by pressing the shutter button.
The sound will be recorded in stereo by the camera’s built-in
microphone.
Most commercially-available external stereo microphones with a 3.5 mm
diameter mini plug can be connected to the camera.
259
k Shooting Movies
Notes on Movie Shooting
You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.184) to start
and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is <Q> or <k>. Set
the shooting timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit
button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo
shooting will take effect.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the total movie shooting time
will be approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F) and at
low temperatures (0°C / 32°F).
The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available
since the second half of 2011.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation is a function that allows you to see the
effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc., on the image.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically reflect
the effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
260
k Shooting Movies
Shooting Still Photos
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.
Taking Still Photos during Movie Shooting
If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is
displayed.
The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the
card.
Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other
functions will be the same as for movie shooting.
Function
Settings
Image-recording
quality
As set in [z1: Image quality].
When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or
[1280x720], the aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is
[640x480], the aspect ratio will be 4:3.
ISO Speed*
• With autoexposure shooting: ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
• With manual exposure shooting: See “ISO speed during
manual-exposure shooting” on page 257.
Exposure Setting
• With autoexposure shooting: Automatically-set shutter
speed and aperture.
• With manual exposure shooting: Manually-set shutter
speed and aperture.
* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
261
k Shooting Movies
AEB cannot be used.
Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting.
However, the captured images will not be displayed on the screen.
Depending on the still photo’s image-recording quality, number of shots
during continuous shooting, card performance, etc., movie shooting may
stop automatically.
When you press the <p> button to autofocus during movie
shooting, the following phenomena may occur.
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may be different from that of the
actual scene.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• The movie may record the lens operation noise.
• You cannot shoot still photos when focus is not achieved, such as
when the subject is moving.
Autofocus will not be performed during movie shooting even if the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
If you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting,
using a high-speed card is recommended. Setting a smaller imagerecording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still
photos are also recommended.
You can shoot still photos in all drive modes.
The self-timer can be set before you start shooting a movie. During
movie shooting, the camera will switch to single-image shooting.
262
Shooting Function Settings
f / R / i Settings
While the movie image is displayed on the LCD monitor, if you press the
<f> or <R> button, the setting screen will appear on the LCD
monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the respective
shooting function.
During manual exposure shooting (p.256), you can press the <i>
button to set the ISO speed.
Note that metering mode cannot be set.
263
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In Creative Zone modes, you can set the AF method, Drive mode,
Movie recording size, Digital zoom, White balance, Picture Style,
Auto Lighting Optimizer, and Video snapshots.
In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button. (7)
X The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
Press the <V> key to select a
function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.69) will appear.
Set it by pressing the <U> key.
To set the Picture Style parameters,
press the <B> button.
the setting.
3 ExitPress
<0> to finalize the setting and
return to movie shooting.
264
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
With [Z2: Movie rec. size], you can
set the movie’s image size, frame rate
per second, and compression method.
The frame rate switches automatically
depending on the [53: Video system]
setting.
Image Size
A [1920x1080] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.
The aspect ratio will be 16:9.
B [1280x720] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The
aspect ratio will be 16:9.
C [640x480]
: Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect
ratio will be 4:3.
Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
6/8 : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5/7 : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia,
China, Australia, etc.).
4
: Mainly for motion pictures.
Compression Method
X IPB
: Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently
for recording. Since the file size will be smaller
than with ALL-I, you can shoot longer.
W ALL-I (I-only) : Compresses one frame at a time for recording.
Although the file size will be larger than with
IPB, the movie will be more suited for editing.
265
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
Movie Recording
Size
A
B
Total Recording Time (approx.)
4 GB Card
8 GB Card
16 GB Card
File Size
(approx.)
654 X
16 min.
32 min.
1 hr. 4 min.
235 MB/min.
654 W
5 min.
11 min.
22 min.
685 MB/min.
87
18 min.
37 min.
1 hr. 14 min.
205 MB/min.
12 min.
25 min.
610 MB/min.
X
87
W
6 min.
C 65
X
48 min.
1 hr. 37 min. 3 hr. 14 min.
78 MB/min.
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches
the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed
in the movie-shooting image will start blinking. If you keep shooting
until the movie file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be
created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code
will stop blinking.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot play back consecutively
automatically. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie
to be played.
Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <0> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table (p.287).
266
3 Using Movie Digital Zoom
When the movie size is [1920x1080] (Full HD), you can shoot with an
approx. 3x to 10x digital zoom.
1
Select [Digital zoom].
Under the [Z2] tab, select [Digital
zoom], then press <0>.
[Approx. 3-10x zoom].
2 Select
Select [Approx. 3-10x zoom], then
press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to movie shooting.
digital zoom.
3 UsePress
the <V> button.
X The digital zoom bar will appear.
Press the <W> key to zoom in or
press the <X> key to zoom out.
Movie Servo AF will not work.
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
[FlexiZone - Single] (fixed at center).
To cancel digital zoom, set [Disable]
in step 2.
Use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
If you use movie digital zoom, contrast-detection AF will be used
regardless of the lens used. The AF speed will therefore become slow.
When movie digital zoom is set, the maximum ISO speed will be ISO
6400 (it cannot be expanded to H: equivalent to ISO 12800). Also,
magnified view is not possible.
Since movie digital zoom processes the image digitally, the image will
look rougher at higher magnifications. Noise, light spots, etc., may also
become noticeable.
When movie digital zoom is set, the scene icon will not be displayed.
Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page 241.
Still photo shooting is not possible.
267
3 Setting the Sound Recording
You can shoot movies while recording
sound with the built-in stereo
microphone or a commercially-available
stereo microphone. You can also freely
adjust the sound-recording level.
Set the sound recording with [Z2:
Sound recording].
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
[Auto]
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto
level control will operate automatically in response to the
sound level.
[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording
level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while turning
the <5> dial to adjust the sound-recording level. While
looking at the peak hold indicator (3 sec.), adjust so that the
level meter sometimes lights up the “12” (-12 dB) mark on
the right for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound
will be distorted.
[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.
Wind Filter/Attenuator
[Wind filter] : When [Enable] is set, it reduces the wind noise when
recording outdoors. This feature takes effect only with
the built-in microphone.
Note that [Enable] will also reduce low bass sounds, so
set this function to [Disable] when there is no wind. It
will record a more natural sound than with [Enable].
[Attenuator] : Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] before
shooting, sound distortion may still result if there is a
very loud sound. In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is
recommended.
268
3 Setting the Sound Recording
Using the Microphone
The built-in microphone records stereo sound.
Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting an external
stereo microphone (commercially-available) equipped with a
miniature stereo plug (φ3.5 mm) to the camera’s external
microphone IN terminal (p.20).
In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will
be [On] or [Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted
automatically (same as with [Auto]), but the wind filter function will not
take effect.
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
Both L and R record audio at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
269
3 Setting the Time Code
The time code is a time reference
recorded automatically to synchronize
the video and audio during movie
shooting. It is recorded at all times in the
following units: hours, minutes, seconds,
and frames. It is mainly used during
movie editing.
Set the time code with [Z2: Time
code].
Count Up
[Rec run] : The time code counts up only while you are shooting a
movie.
[Free run] : The time code counts up whether you are shooting or not.
Start Time Setting
You can set the time code’s start time.
[Manual input setting] : You can freely set the hour, minute, second,
and frames.
[Reset]
: The time will be reset to the time set with
[Manual input setting] and [Set to camera
time]. It will be “00:00:00.” or “00:00:00:”
(p.272).
[Set to camera time] : Sets hours, minutes, and seconds to match
the camera’s internal clock. “Frames” will be
set to 00.
Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code.
If [Free run] is set and you change the time, zone, or daylight saving
time (p.37), the time code will be affected.
The time code is not recorded for video snapshots.
Regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting, the time code will always be
recorded to the movie file.
270
3 Setting the Time Code
Movie Recording Count
You can select what to display on the movie-shooting screen.
[Rec time]
: Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie
shooting.
[Time code] : Indicates the time code during movie shooting.
Movie Playback Count
You can select what to display on the movie playback screen.
[Rec time]
: Displays the recording time and playback time during
movie playback.
[Time code] : Displays the time code during movie playback.
With [Time code] set:
During movie shooting
During movie playback
If you change the setting for either [Movie play count] in [Z2: Time
code] or for [x3: Movie play count], the other setting will also change
accordingly.
“Frames” are not displayed during movie shooting and movie playback.
271
3 Setting the Time Code
Drop Frame
If the frame rate setting is 6 (29.97 fps) or 8 (59.94 fps), the time
code’s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and
time code. This discrepancy can be corrected automatically. This
correction function is called drop frame.
[Enable] : The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping
time code numbers (DF: Drop frame).
[Disable] : The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: Non-drop frame).
The time code will be displayed as follows:
[Enable] (DF) : 00:00:00. (00:00:00.00 during playback)
[Disable] (NDF) : 00:00:00: (00:00:00:00 during playback)
If the frame rate is 4 (23.98 fps), 5 (25.00 fps), or 7 (50.00 fps), there
will be no drop frames. (If 4 is set or if [53: Video system] is set to [PAL],
the drop frame option will not appear.)
272
3 Menu Function Settings
Z1
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the
[Z1] and [Z2] tabs dedicated to
movie shooting will be displayed.
AF method
The AF methods are the same as described on pages 233-242. You
can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single].
For movie shooting, [Quick mode] cannot be set.
Movie Servo AF
During movie shooting, the camera focuses the subject
continuously. The default setting is [Enable].
When [Enable] is set:
• The camera focuses the subject continuously even when you are
not pressing the shutter button halfway.
• Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery
power and shorten the movie shooting time (p.266).
• With certain lenses, the lens operation noise during focusing may
be recorded. To reduce the recording of the lens operation noise,
use a commercially-available external microphone. With EF-S 1855mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM or EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens,
the lens operation noise is less prone to be recorded.
• If you want to set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> during
Movie Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting
switch to <A>.
273
3 Menu Function Settings
• If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or you do not want
the lens operation noise to be recorded, you can temporarily stop
Movie Servo AF as follows. When you stop Movie Servo AF, the
AF point will turn gray. When you perform the same steps below,
Movie Servo AF will resume.
• Tap the [ ] icon on the lower left of the screen.
• Press the <D> button.
• Under [8C.Fn III-4: Custom controls], if a button is assigned
with [AF stop], you can pause the Movie Servo AF while
holding down that button. When you let go of the button, Movie
Servo AF will resume.
• While Movie Servo AF is paused, pressing the <M> or <x>
button, changing the AF method, or other operation will have
Movie Servo AF resume when you resume movie shooting.
When [Disable] is set:
• Press the shutter button halfway (only before you start movie
shooting) or press the <p> button to focus.
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
241.
Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
Movie Servo AF will not work during movie digital zooming.
During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
274
3 Menu Function Settings
Silent LV shootingN
This function applies to still photo shooting. For details, see page
231.
Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
275
3 Menu Function Settings
Z2
Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you align the
intersections over the subject for better balance in the composition.
Movie recording size
You can set the movie recording size (image size, frame rate, and
compression method). For details, see page 265.
Digital zoom
You can use digital zoom for telephoto shooting. For details, see
page 267.
Sound recording
You can set sound-recording settings. For details, see page 268.
Time code
You can set the time code. For details, see page 270.
Video snapshot
You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 277.
276
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
A video snapshot is a short video clip lasting about 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8
sec. A series of video snapshots can be strung together to form a video
snapshot album to show highlights of a trip, event, etc.
A video snapshot album can also be played together with background
music (p.284, 309).
Video Snapshot Album Concept
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot x
Video snapshot album
Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration
1
Select [Video snapshot].
Under the [Z2] tab, select [Video
snapshot], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
277
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
[Album settings].
3 Select
Select [Album settings], then press
<0>.
[Create a new album].
4 Select
Select [Create a new album], then
press <0>.
the snapshot length.
5 Select
Press <0> and use the <V> key to
select the snapshot’s length, then
press <0>.
[OK].
6 Select
Select [OK], then press <0>.
Shooting duration
278
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
X A blue bar will appear to indicate the
snapshot length.
Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.279).
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
the first video snapshot.
7 Shoot
Press the <0> button, then shoot.
X The blue bar indicating the shooting
duration will gradually decrease. After
the set shooting duration elapses, the
shooting stops automatically.
X The confirmation dialog will appear
(p.280).
as a video snapshot album.
8 Save
Select [J Save as album], then
press <0>.
X The movie clip will be saved as the
video snapshot album’s first video
snapshot.
to shoot more video
9 Continue
snapshots.
Repeat step 7 to shoot the next video
snapshot.
Select [J Add to album], then press
<0>.
To create another video snapshot
album, select [W Save as a new
album].
If necessary, do step 9 again.
video snapshot shooting.
10 ExitSetthe[Video
snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie
shooting, be sure to set [Disable].
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to the normal movie
shooting.
279
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Options in Steps 8 and 9
Function
Description
JSave as album
(Step 8)
The movie clip will be saved as the video
snapshot album’s first video snapshot.
JAdd to album
(Step 9)
The video snapshot just shot will be
added to the album recorded immediately
before.
W Save as a new album
(Step 9)
A new video snapshot album is created
and the movie clip is saved as the first
video snapshot. The new album will be a
different file from the previously recorded
album.
1 Playback video snapshot
(Steps 8 and 9)
The video snapshot just recorded will be
played. For playback operations, see the
table on the next page.
r Do not save to album
(Step 8)
r Delete without saving to album
(Step 9)
The video snapshot just recorded will be
erased instead of being saved to the
album. Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
280
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
[Playback video snapshot] Operations
Function
Playback Description
7 Play
By pressing <0>, you can play or pause the justrecorded video snapshot.
5 First frame
Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.
Skip backward*
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back
by a few seconds.
3 Previous frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.
Skip forward*
4 Last frame
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips
forward by a few seconds.
Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.308) volume by
turning the <6> dial.
32
Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous
screen.
* With [Skip backward] and [Skip forward], the skipping length will correspond
to the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or
8 sec.).
281
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Adding to an Existing Album
1
Select [Add to existing album].
Follow step 4 on page 278 to select
[Add to existing album], then press
<0>.
an existing album.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select an
existing album, then press <0>.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X Certain video snapshot settings will
change to match the existing album’s
settings.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
X The video snapshot shooting screen
will appear.
the video snapshot.
3 Shoot
Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.279).
You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
282
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots
You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration
(approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).
Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a
new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
• Changing the [Movie rec. size].
• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto] or [Manual] to
[Disable] or from [Disable] to [Auto] or [Manual].
• Updating the firmware.
You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.
The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.
Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during
playback may not be exact.
283
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Playing an Album
You can play a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal
movie (p.308).
1
Play back the movie.
Press the <x> button to display an
image.
the album.
2 Select
In the single-image display, the
[
] icon displayed on the upper
left of the screen indicates a video
snapshot album.
Turn the <5> dial to select an
album.
back the album.
3 PlayPress
<0>.
On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [7] (Play), then
press <0>.
Background Music
You can play background music when you play back albums, normal
movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.309, 312). To play
background music, you must first copy the background music to the card
using EOS Utility (provided software). For information on how to copy the
background music, refer to the Software Instruction Manual PDF on the
DVD-ROM.
Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private
enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.
284
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Editing an Album
After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video
snapshots in the album.
1
Select [X].
On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [X] (Edit), then
press <0>.
X The editing screen will be displayed.
an editing operation.
2 Select
Select an editing option, then press
<0>.
Function
Description
Move snapshot
Press the <U> key to select the video snapshot you
want to move, then press <0>. Press the <U> key to
move the snapshot, then press <0>.
Delete snapshot
Press the <U> key to select the video snapshot you
want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will be
displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing
<0> again will cancel the selection and [L] will
disappear.
Play snapshot
Press the <U> key to select the video snapshot you
want to play, then press <0>.
285
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
the edited movie.
3 Save
Press the <M> button to return to
the Editing panel at the screen’s
bottom.
Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
X The save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
Provided Software Usable with Albums
EOS Video Snapshot Task: Enables the editing of albums. This add-on
function for ImageBrowser EX is automatically downloaded from the
Internet using the auto update function.
286
Movie Shooting Cautions
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red <E>
icon will appear.
The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. You should stop still photo shooting and allow the camera’s
internal temperature to cool before shooting again. Since movie image
quality will hardly be affected, you can still shoot movies.
The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, turn
off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a
tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended to set
the IS switch to <2>.
The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation
noise. Using a commercially-available external microphone can prevent
(or reduce) these noises from being recorded.
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, that part
may look momentarily still when you play back the movie. In such cases,
shoot movies with manual exposure.
If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded in almost
the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.
In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.
287
Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie
shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting
Indicator
will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
Still Photo Shooting during Movie Shooting
Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page
249.
Playback and TV connection
If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.316, 319) and shoot a movie,
the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the
sound will be properly recorded.
288
9
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to play back and erase
photos and movies, how to display them on a TV
screen, and other playback-related functions.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
289
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
Press the <x> button.
X The last captured image or last image
played back will appear.
an image.
2 Select
To play back images starting with the
last image, turn the <5> dial
counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
Each time you press the <B>
button, the display format will change.
290
No information
With basic information
Histogram
Shooting information display
x Image Playback
the image playback.
3 ExitPress
the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
3 Grid Display
On the single-image display, you can
overlay a playback grid.
With [33: Playback grid], you can
select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag
n].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt, as
well as composition.
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
291
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Still Photo Taken in a Creative Zone Mode
AF Microadjustment
Exposure compensation amount
Protect images
Flash exposure compensation
amount / HDR mode /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Rating
Folder number - File number
Aperture
Histogram
(Brightness/RGB)
Shutter speed
Picture Style/
Settings
Metering mode
Shooting mode/
Multiple exposure
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
White balance
Color space
Shooting date and time
Image-recording
quality
Playback number/
Total images recorded
Color temperature
when <P> is set
White balance correction
File size
Eye-Fi transfer
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* <w> and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images
taken in the HDR mode.
* <P> will be displayed for multiple-exposure photos.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.
* For images developed with the camera’s RAW processing function, resized, or
processed with a Creative filter and then saved, <u> will be displayed.
292
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Still Photo Taken in a Basic Zone Mode
Ambience and
ambience effects
Shooting mode
Lighting or scene
* With images taken in a Basic Zone mode, the information displayed will differ
depending on the shooting mode.
* [Background blur] will be displayed for images taken in the <C> mode.
Sample Movie Information Display
Shooting time, Playback time/
Time code
Playback
Shutter speed
Aperture
Shooting mode
Movie recording
size
Frame rate
Movie file size
Compression method
* If manual exposure was used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed
(when set manually) will be displayed.
* The < > icon will be displayed for video snapshots.
293
B: Shooting Information Display
Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed
highlight areas will blink. To obtain more image detail in the
overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a
negative amount and shoot again.
AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection was used, multiple AF points may be displayed at the
same time.
294
B: Shooting Information Display
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:
Histogram disp.].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level. The
horizontal axis indicates the brightness level
Dark image
(darker on the left and brighter on the right),
while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each brightness level. The more
Normal brightness
pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
image. The more pixels there are toward the
right, the brighter the image. If there are too
Bright image
many pixels on the left, the shadow detail will be
lost. If there are too many pixels on the right, the
highlight detail will be lost. The gradation in-between will be
reproduced. By checking the image and its brightness histogram,
you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s
brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal
axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter
on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for
each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the
darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels there are toward the
right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the
left, the respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By
checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation
and gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.
295
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine
images on one screen.
1
Î
Switch to the index display.
During image playback, press the
<I> button.
X The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted in an orange frame.
Press the <I> button again to
switch to the 9-image display.
Pressing the <u> button will switch
the display from 9 images to 4 images
and then to 1 image.
Î
an image.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to move the
orange frame and select the image.
You can also press the <V> <U>
keys to select the image.
Turning the <6> dial will display
image(s) on the next or previous
screen.
Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image as a
single image.
296
x Searching for Images Quickly
I
Jump through Images (Jump Display)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [Image jump w/6].
Under the [32] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
the jump method.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the jump
method, then press <0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
f: Jump 100 images
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
k: Display by image rating (p.302)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
by jumping.
3 Browse
Press the <x> button to play back
Jump method
Playback position
images.
In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
X You can browse by the method that
was set.
To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date].
To search images according to folder, select [Folder].
If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display only one or the other.
If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the
images with the <6> dial.
297
u/y Magnified View
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.
1
Magnify the image.
Press the <u> button during image
playback.
X The image will be magnified.
If you hold down the <u> button, the
image will be magnified until it
reaches the maximum magnification.
Press the <I> button to reduce
the magnification. If you hold down
the button, the magnification will be
reduced to the single-image display.
Magnified area position
around the image.
2 Scroll
Use <9> to scroll around the
magnified image.
To exit magnified view, press the
<x> button and the single-image
display will reappear.
You can turn the <5> dial to view another image while the magnification
is maintained.
Magnified view is not possible during the image review immediately after
the image is taken.
A movie cannot be magnified.
298
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your
fingers for various playback operations. First, press the <x> button
to play back images.
Browsing Images
Swipe with one finger.
With single-image display, touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
image by swiping your finger to the
left or right. Swipe left to see the next
(newer) images or swipe right to see
previous (older) images.
With index display, also touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
screen by swiping your finger up or
down.
Swipe up to see the next (newer)
images or swipe down to see the
previous (older) images.
When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
Swipe with two fingers.
Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers.
When you swipe two fingers to the left
or right, you can jump through images
with the method set in [Image jump w/
6] under the [x2] tab.
299
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
Reducing Image (Index Display)
Pinch two fingers.
Touch the screen with two fingers spread
apart, then pinch your fingers together
on the screen.
Each time you pinch your fingers, the
screen changes from a single-image
display to a 4-image index display and
9-image index display. If you spread
your fingers, the image display will
change in the reverse order.
When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Magnifying Image
Spread two fingers apart.
Touch the screen with two fingers
together, then spread your fingers apart
on the screen.
As you spread your fingers, the
image will be magnified.
The image can be magnified up to 10x.
You can scroll around the image by
dragging your finger.
To reduce the image, pinch your
fingers together on the screen.
Tapping the [2] icon will return to the
single-image display.
Touch screen operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible while
playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.316, 319).
300
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1
Select [Rotate image].
Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
You can also select an image in the
index display (p.296).
the image.
3 Rotate
Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
If you have set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.325) before taking
vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
A movie cannot be rotated.
301
3 Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
1
Select [Rating].
Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image or movie to be rated.
To display the three-image display,
press the <I> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
the image.
3 RatePress
the <V> key to select a
rating.
X The total number of images rated will
be counted for each rating.
To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
302
3 Setting Ratings
The total number of images with a given rating that can be displayed is up to
999. If there are more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be
displayed for that rating.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only images with a
specific rating.
With [32: Slide show], you can play back only images with a specific
rating.
With Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.457), you can
select only images with a specific rating (still photos only).
With Windows 7 or Windows Vista, etc., you can see each file’s rating as
part of the file information display or in the provided image viewer (still
photos only).
303
Q Quick Control for Playback
During single-image display, you can press the <Q> button to set any
of the following: [J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9:
Rating], [U: Creative filters], [S: Resize] (JPEG image only), [ :
Highlight alert], [ : AF point display], [e: Image jump w/6], [k:
Wi-Fi*].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
* Not selectable if [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Disable].
1
Press the <Q> button.
During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
X The Quick Control options will
appear.
a function and set it.
2 Select
Press the <V> key to select a
function.
X The setting of the selected function is
displayed at the bottom.
Press the <U> key to change it.
When setting the Creative filters
(p.335), Resize (p.333), or Wi-Fi
function, also press <0> to finalize
the setting.
Image jump w/6: Set the Rating
(p.297) by pressing the <B>
button.
To cancel, press the <M> button.
the setting.
3 ExitPress
the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control screen.
304
Q Quick Control for Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be limited.
305
k Enjoying Movies
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
Playback on a TV Set (p.316, 319)
Use the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) or stereo AV cable AVCDC400ST (sold separately) to connect
the camera to a TV set. Then you can
play back captured movies and still
photos on TV.
If you have a High-Definition TV set and
connect your camera with an HDMI
cable, you can watch Full High-Definition
(Full HD: 1920x1080) and HighDefinition (HD: 1280x720) movies with
higher image quality.
Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played nor saved.
If the playback device is not compatible with MOV files, the movie cannot
be played.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.308-315)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with EOS
Video Snapshot Task (p.286) can be played on the camera.
306
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer (p.457)
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a computer and played
with ImageBrowser EX (provided
software).
To have the movie play back smoothly on a computer, use a highperformance computer. Regarding the computer hardware requirements
for ImageBrowser EX, refer to the PDF file ImageBrowser EX User
Guide.
If you want to use commercially-available software to play back or edit
the movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on
commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.
307
k Playing Movies
1
Play back the image.
Press the <x> button to display an
image.
a movie.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played.
In the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the
upper left of the screen indicates a
movie. If the movie is a video
snapshot, <
> will be displayed.
In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
from the index display, press <0>
to switch to the single-image
display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
X The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
back the movie.
4 PlaySelect
[7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker
X The movie will start playing.
You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
You can adjust the sound volume by
turning the <6> dial even during
movie playback.
For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
The camera may not be able to play movies shot with another camera.
308
k Playing Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
Playback Description
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <U> key.
The slow motion speed is indicated at the upper right of the
screen.
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous
frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.
4 Last frame
Displays the movie’s last frame.
Background
music*
Plays back a movie with the selected background music
(p.315).
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (p.310).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds with [Movie play count:
Rec time] set)
hh:mm:ss.ff (DF) Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with [Movie
hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF) play count: Time code] set)
9 Volume
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.308) volume by
turning the <6> dial.
32
Pressing the <M> button returns to the single-image
display.
* When background music is set, the movie’s sound will not be played.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C / 73°F) will be as follows: approx. 4 hours.
If you connect the camera to a TV set to play a movie (p.316, 319),
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not
change the sound volume.)
If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.
309
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
Playback with the Touch Screen
Tap [7] at the center of the screen.
X The movie will start playing.
To display the movie playback panel,
tap <s1> on the upper left of the
screen.
To pause the movie while it is playing,
tap the screen. The movie playback
panel will also appear.
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
1
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
X The movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
Press the <U> key to see the
previous or next frames. Holding it
down will fast forward the frames.
Turn the <5> dial for frame-byframe playback.
After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in gray on the top of the screen is
what will remain.
310
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
3 Check
Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
To change the editing, go back to step
2.
To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation screen.
the edited movie.
4 Save
Select [W], then press <0>.
X The save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
On the confirmation screen, select
[OK], then press <0> to save the
edited movie and return to the movie
playback screen.
Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
311
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Number of images to be played
Select [Slide show].
Under the [32] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
the images to be played.
2 Select
Press the <V> key to select the
desired option, then press <0>.
[All images]/[Movies]/[Stills]
Press the <V> key to select one of
the following: [jAll images]/
[kMovies]/[zStills]. Then press
<0>.
[Date]/[Folder]/[Rating]
Press the <V> key to select one of
the following: [iDate]/[nFolder]/
[9Rating].
When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
Press the <V> key to select the
desired option, then press <0>.
[Date]
312
[Folder]
[Rating]
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Item
Playback Description
jAll images
All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
iDate
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
nFolder
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
kMovies
Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills
Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
9Rating
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
[Set up] as desired.
3 SetPress
the <V> key to select [Set
up], then press <0>.
Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), [Transition
effect] (effect when changing
images), and [Background music]
for the still photos.
The background music selection
procedure is explained on page 315.
After selecting the settings, press the
<M> button.
[Display time]
[Repeat]
313
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
[Transition effect]
[Background music]
the slide show.
4 StartPress
the <V> key to select [Start],
then press <0>.
X After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
slide show.
5 ExitTothe
exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the
<M> button.
To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the
still photo display format (p.290).
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
During auto playback, auto power off will not work.
The display time may vary depending on the image.
To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 316.
314
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Selecting the Background Music
After you use EOS Utility (provided software) to copy background music
to the card, you can play background music together with the slide
show.
1
Select [Background music].
Set [Background music] to [On],
then press <0>.
If the card has no background music,
you cannot perform step 2.
the background music.
2 Select
Press the <V> key to select the
desired background music, then
press <0>. You can also select
multiple background music tracks.
background music.
3 PlayTo the
listen to a sample of the
background music, press the
<B> button.
Press the <V> key to play another
background music track. To stop
listening to the background music,
press the <B> button again.
Adjust the sound volume by turning
the <6> dial.
To delete a background music track,
press the <V> key and select the
track, then press the <L> button.
Upon purchase, the camera does not have background music. The
procedure to copy background music to a card is explained in the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual PDF on the DVD-ROM.
315
Viewing Images on a TV Set
You can view still photos and movies on a TV set.
Viewing on High-Definition (HD) TV Sets
(Connected with HDMI)
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s
HDMI IN port.
on the TV and switch the
3 Turn
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
316
Viewing Images on a TV Set
the <x> button.
5 Press
X The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
The images will automatically be
displayed at the TV’s optimum
resolution.
By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
To play back movies, see page 308.
The images cannot be output at the same time from both the <D>
and <q> terminals.
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain TVs may not be able to display the captured movies. In such a
case, use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) to
connect to the TV.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1
Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
317
Viewing Images on a TV Set
the camera to a TV set.
2 Connect
Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV.
X The TV’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera.
the camera’s <x> button.
3 Press
X An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV’s
remote control to play back images.
an image.
4 Select
Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback menu
Movie playback menu
: Return
: 9-image index
: Play movie
: Slide show
: Disp. shooting info
: Rotate
the remote control’s Enter
5 Press
button.
X The menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
Press the / button to select the
desired option, then press the Enter
button. For a slide show, press the
remote control’s / button to select
an option, then press the Enter button.
If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],
and use the camera to control the playback operation.
318
Viewing Images on a TV Set
Viewing on Non-HD TV Sets (Connected with AV Cable)
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) is required.
1
Connect the AV cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing
the back of the camera, insert it into
the <q> terminal.
the AV cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
(Red)
(White)
AUDIO
(Yellow)
VIDEO
Connect the AV cable to the TV’s
video IN terminal and audio IN
terminals.
on the TV and switch the
3 Turn
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the <x> button.
5 Press
X The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
To play back movies, see page 308.
Do not use any AV cable other than the Stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately). Movies may not be displayed if you use a different
cable.
If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the movies will not
be displayed properly. If this happens, switch to the proper video system
format with [53: Video system].
319
K Protecting Images
Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.
3 Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [Protect images].
Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
X An image will be displayed.
Image protect icon
the image.
3 Protect
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected, then press
<0>.
X The image will be protected, and the
<K> icon will appear at the top of
the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
To protect another image, repeat step
3.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
320
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at one time.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.57), the protected images will also be erased.
Movies can also be protected.
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
If you erase all the images (p.323), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
321
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.320) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure
you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent
important images from being erased accidentally, protect
them. Erasing a RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW
and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
1 Play back the image to be erased.
the <L> button.
2 Press
X The Erase menu will appear at the
bottom of the screen.
the image.
3 Erase
Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
3 Checkmarking <X> Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can
erase multiple images at one time.
1
322
Select [Erase images].
Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
L Erasing Images
[Select and erase images].
2 Select
Select [Select and erase images],
then press <0>.
X An image will be displayed.
To display the three-image display,
press the <I> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
the images to be erased.
3 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be erased, then press
<0>.
X A checkmark <X> will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
To select other images to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the image.
4 Erase
Press the <L> button.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The selected images will be erased.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at one time. When
[31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
To also erase protected images, format the card (p.57).
323
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to
read.
1
Select [LCD brightness].
2
Adjust the brightness.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>.
While referring to the gray chart,
press the <U> key, then press
<0>.
To check the image’s exposure, looking at the histogram is recommended
(p.295).
324
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the computer instead of
horizontally. You can change the setting for this
feature.
1
Select [Auto rotate].
Under the [51] tab, select [Auto
rotate], then press <0>.
the auto rotation.
2 SetSelect
the desired setting, then press
<0>.
OnzD
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both
the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
OnD
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.
Off
The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.
Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be
automatically rotated for the image review.
If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the
image may not be rotated automatically for playback.
If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,
it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image. Using
the provided software is recommended.
325
326
10
Post-Processing
Images
You can process RAW images with the camera, resize
(reduce the pixel count of) JPEG images, and apply
Creative filters.
The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
Post-processing images as described in this chapter is not
possible if the camera is set for multiple exposures, or while it
is connected to a computer via the <C> terminal.
327
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG
images. While the RAW image itself does not change, you can process
the RAW image according to different conditions to create any number
of JPEG images from it.
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.457) to
process those images.
1
Select [RAW image processing].
Under the [31] tab, select [RAW
image processing], then press
<0>.
X 1 images will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to process.
By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the image.
3 Process
Press <0> and then the RAWprocessing options will appear
(p.330).
Press the <V> <U> keys to
select an option, then turn the <5>
dial to change the setting.
X The displayed image will reflect
“Brightness adjustment”, “White
balance”, and the other setting
adjustments.
To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <B>
button.
328
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Displaying the setting screen
Press <0> to display the setting
screen. Turn the <5> or <6> dial
to change the setting. To finalize the
change and return to the screen in
step 3, press <0>.
the image.
4 Save
Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
Select [OK] to save the image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To process another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
Magnified View
You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The
magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [Image quality]
set in [RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the
magnified image.
To cancel magnified view, press the <I> button.
Images with Aspect Ratio Setting
Images shot in an aspect ratio (p.229) of [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] will be
displayed in the respective aspect ratio. JPEG images will also be
saved in the set aspect ratio.
When Wi-Fi function is used, RAW image processing cannot be performed.
329
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
RAW Image Processing Options
Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.
Picture Style (p.126)
You can select the Picture Style. Press the <U> key to select the
Picture Style. To set the parameters such as sharpness, press the
<B> button to display the setting screen. Press the <V> key to
select a parameter to be adjusted, then press the <U> key to
change it. To finalize the setting and return to the screen in step 3,
press <0>. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.
White balance (p.134)
You can select the white balance. If you select [P], turn the <6>
dial to set the color temperature on the setting screen. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect.
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.140)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will
reflect the setting’s effect.
High ISO speed noise reduction (p.141)
You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.329).
Image quality (p.116)
You can set the image quality when converting an image to JPEG
format. The image size displayed, such as [***M ****x****], has a 3:2
aspect ratio. The pixel count of each aspect ratio is indicated in the
table on page 334.
330
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Color space (p.155)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the image will not look
very different when either color space is set.
Peripheral illumination correction (p.146)
If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect
is difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.329) and check the four
corners. The peripheral illumination correction applied with the
camera will be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional
(provided software) and may be less apparent. In such a case, use
Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination
correction.
Chromatic aberration correction (p.147)
When [Enable] is set, the lens’ chromatic aberrations (color fringing
along the subject’s outline) can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.329).
Distortion correction
When [Enable] is set, image distortion due to the lens
characteristics is corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image
will be displayed. The image periphery will be cropped in the
corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, use the Picture
Style’s sharpness parameter to make adjustments as necessary.
331
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion Correction, and
Chromatic Aberration Correction
To execute peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and
chromatic aberration correction with the camera, the data of the lens used
for the shot must be registered in the camera. If the lens data has not been
registered in the camera, use EOS Utility (provided software, p.457) to
register the lens data.
Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results
as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional.
When processing images with [Distortion correction] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.294) and Dust Delete Data (p.341) will
not be appended to the image.
332
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a
new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/b
images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [Resize].
Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
X An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to resize.
By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the desired image size.
3 Select
Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
Press the <U> key to select the
desired image size, then press <0>.
Target sizes
the image.
4 Save
Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
333
S Resizing JPEG Images
Resize Options According to Original Image Size
Available Resize Settings
Original Image
Size
4
a
b
c
3
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
a
k
b
Image Sizes
The image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page, such as
[***M ****x****], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to
aspect ratios is shown in the table below.
The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the
aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
4
3648x2432
3248x2432*
3648x2048*
2432x2432
(8.9 megapixels) (7.9 megapixels) (7.5 megapixels) (5.9 megapixels)
a
2736x1824
2432x1824
2736x1536*
1824x1824
(5.0 megapixels) (4.4 megapixels) (4.2 megapixels) (3.3 megapixels)
b
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
c
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
When Wi-Fi function is used, resizing is not possible.
334
U Applying Creative Filters
You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a
new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.
1
Select [Creative filters].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Creative
filters], then press <0>.
X An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to apply a filter to.
By pressing the <Hy> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
a filter.
3 Select
When you press <0>, the types of
Creative filters will be displayed
(p.336).
Press the <U> key to select a filter,
then press <0>.
X The image will be displayed with the
corresponding filter applied.
the filter effect.
4 Adjust
Press the <U> key to adjust the
filter effect, then press <0>.
For the Miniature effect, press the
<V> key and select the image area
(within the white frame) where you
want the image to look sharp, then
press <0>.
While Wi-Fi is used, Creative filters cannot be applied.
335
U Applying Creative Filters
the image.
5 Save
Select [OK] to save the image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To apply a filter to another image,
repeat steps 2 to 5.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
When shooting 1+JPEG images, the Creative filter will be applied to
the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image.
When shooting 41+JPEG or 61+JPEG images, the Creative filter
will be applied to the JPEG image.
During Live View shooting, if an aspect ratio was set for a 1 image
and a Creative filter is applied to it, the image will be saved in the aspect
ratio that was set.
Creative Filter Characteristics
Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
336
U Applying Creative Filters
Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will
magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter
effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look threedimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note that
the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered with a
smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes
may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular
or have significant noise.
Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it
look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast
by adjusting the color tone.
Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 4, if you press the <B> button (or tap on [ ] at the
screen’s bottom), you can switch between the white frame’s vertical
and horizontal orientations.
337
338
11
Sensor Cleaning
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to
automatically shake off dust adhered to the image
sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the
image so that the dust spots remaining can be erased
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (provided
software, p.457).
Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases
lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of
the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor
cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start
shooting immediately.
339
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning at any
time, or disable it.
Cleaning the Sensor Now
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
Under the [54] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there
will be a shutter sound, no picture is
taken.
For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option will remain disabled temporarily.
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
X The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
340
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (provided software, p.457) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity
(u). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens
and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1
Select [Dust Delete Data].
Under the [z4] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
Select [OK] and press <0>. After
the automatic self-cleaning of the
sensor is performed, a message will
appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound during the cleaning, no
picture is taken.
341
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.
- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
X The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
X When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
Select [OK] and the menu will
reappear.
If the data was not obtained
successfully, an error message will
appear. Follow the “Preparation”
procedure on the preceding page, then
select [OK]. Take the picture again.
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (provided software,
p.457) to erase dust spots, refer to the Software Instruction Manual
PDF (p.453) on the DVD-ROM.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.
342
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the
sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon
Service Center is recommended.
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
Under the [54] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean manually].
2 Select
Select [Clean manually], then press
<0>.
[OK].
3 Select
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X In a moment, the reflex mirror will
lockup and the shutter will open.
“CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.
4 Clean the sensor.
5 EndSetthethecleaning.
power switch to <2>.
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged. If the battery grip with sizeAA/LR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.
For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) is
recommended.
343
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force
can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
344
12
Printing Images
Printing (p.348)
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print
out the images on the card. The camera is compatible with
“wPictBridge”, which is the standard for direct printing.
You can also use a wireless LAN to send images to a
PictBridge (DPS over IP) printer and print them. For details,
refer to the Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.355)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the
print order to a photofinisher.
Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.359)
You can specify images on the card for printing in a
photobook.
345
Preparing to Print
The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the
camera while you look at the camera’s LCD monitor.
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
1
Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
the printer.
2 SetForupdetails,
refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
3
Connect the Camera to the
Printer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
Connect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
4 Turn on the printer.
the camera’s power switch to
5 Set
<1>.
X Some printers may make a beeping
sound.
346
Preparing to Print
wPictBridge
back the image.
6 PlayPress
the <x> button.
X The image will appear, with the <w>
icon on the upper left of the screen to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.
Make sure the printer has a PictBridge connection port.
Movies cannot be printed.
The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct
or Bubble Jet Direct.
Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.
If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.354).
Printing is not possible when shooting mode is set to <F> or <G>, Multi
Shot Noise Reduction is set, or HDR mode is set.
If [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], direct printing is not possible. Set it to
[Disable], then connect the interface cable.
You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.
If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged. With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 4 hours is
possible.
Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) to
power the camera is recommended.
347
w Printing
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Printer-connected icon
1
Select the image to be printed.
Check that the <w> icon is
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be printed.
<0>.
2 Press
X The print setting screen will appear.
Print setting screen
Sets the printing effects (p.350).
Sets the date or file number imprinting to on
or off (p.351).
Sets the quantity to be printed (p.351).
Sets the print area (p.353).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout (p.349).
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.
[Paper settings].
3 Select
Select [Paper settings], then press
<0>.
X The paper settings screen will
appear.
348
w Printing
Q Setting the Paper Size
Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
X The paper type screen will appear.
Y Setting the Paper Type
Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
X The page layout screen will appear.
U Setting the Page Layout
Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
X The print setting screen will reappear.
Bordered
The print will have white borders along the edges.
Borderless
The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print
borderless prints, the print will have borders.
Borderedc
The shooting information*1 will be imprinted on the border on
9x13 cm or larger prints.
xx-up
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.
20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper*2.
20-upc
• [20-upc] will have the shooting information*1 imprinted.
35-upp
Default
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.
*1: From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter
speed, aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance,
etc., will be imprinted.
*2: After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.355), printing
by following “Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images” (p.358) is recommended.
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio, the image
may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless print. If the image is
cropped, it may look grainier on the paper due to the fewer number of pixels.
349
w Printing
effects.
4 SetSetthethemprinting
if necessary. If you do not need
to set any printing effects, go to step 5.
What is displayed on the screen
differs depending on the printer.
Select the option, then press <0>.
Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
If the <z> and <e> icons are
displayed brightly, you can also adjust
the printing effect (p.352).
Printing Effect
Description
EOn
The image will be printed using the printer’s standard colors.
The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.
EOff
No automatic correction will be applied.
EVIVID
The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce
more vivid blues and greens.
ENR
Image noise is reduced before printing.
0 B/W
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.
0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
zNatural
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic
color adjustments are applied.
zNatural M
The printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural”
setting. However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments
than with “Natural.”
EDefault
The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details,
refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image
displayed on the upper left of the screen. Note that the printed image may look
slightly different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation.
This also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 352.
If the shooting information of an image shot at the “H” ISO speed is
imprinted, the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
350
w Printing
the date and file number
5 Set
imprinting.
Set them if necessary.
Select <I>, then press <0>.
Set the print settings as desired, then
press <0>.
of copies.
6 SetSettheit ifnumber
necessary.
Select <R>, then press <0>.
Select the number of copies, then
press <0>.
printing.
7 StartSelect
[Print], then press <0>.
The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer
to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings
are.
Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
If image tilt correction (p.353) is applied, it may take longer to print the
image.
To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
If you execute [54: Clear all camera settings] (p.61), all the settings
will revert to their defaults.
351
w Printing
e Adjustment of Printing Effects
In step 4 on page 350, select the printing
effect. When the <e> icon is displayed
brightly next to <z>, you can press
the <B> button. You can then adjust
the printing effect. What can be adjusted
or what is displayed will depend on the
selection made in step 4.
Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can change
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the
image’s brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press
the <B> button to change the position of the
<h>. Press the <U> key to freely adjust the
shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255).
kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject’s face look
dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on
the screen.
When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast],
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color
balance], use <9>. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for
green. The image’s color balance will be corrected towards the selected
color.
If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
their defaults.
352
w Printing
Cropping the Image
Tilt correction
You can crop the image and print only an
enlarged version of the cropped portion,
as if the image had been recomposed.
Set the cropping right before printing.
If you change the print settings after
setting the cropping, you may have to set
the cropping again before printing.
1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
2 Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The
cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
When you press the <u> or <I> button, the size of the
cropping frame will change. The smaller the cropping frame, the
larger the image magnification will be for printing.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally.
Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.
Rotating the Frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame
between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you
to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image Tilt Correction
By turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.
3 Press <0> to exit the cropping.
X The print setting screen will reappear.
You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the
print setting screen.
353
w Printing
Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as
you specified.
The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
While cropping the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look
at the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed
accurately.
Handling Printer Errors
If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to
resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to
resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the
problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer
to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
354
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.
The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They
cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
1
Select [Print order].
Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
[Set up].
2 Select
Select [Set up], then press <0>.
as desired.
3 SetSetthetheoption
[Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
[Print type]
[Date]
[File No.]
355
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print type
Date
File number
K
Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
L
Both
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Off
On
Off
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file number on the print.
4
Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button.
X The print order screen will reappear.
Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
have been set. It will not work if you just extract images from the card
and try to print them.
Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may
be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the print order may
not be possible.
RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW
images with PictBridge (p.345).
356
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print Ordering
Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
To display the three-image display, press
the <I> button. To return to the
single-image display, press the <u>
button.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
Quantity
Total images selected
Checkmark
Index icon
[Standard] [Both]
Press the <V> key to set the number of
copies to be printed for the displayed
image.
[Index]
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box <X>. The image will be included in
the index print.
Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear
all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will
all be canceled.
All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [Byn] or [All image].
When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be
printed.
357
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.
1
Prepare to print.
See page 346.
Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to
step 5.
2 Under the [31] tab, select [Print order].
3 Select [Print].
[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.
4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.348).
Set the printing effects (p.350) if necessary.
5 Select [OK].
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.
If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if any of the
following occur:
• Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted
print-ordered images.
• When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before resuming the printing.
• When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.
If a problem occurs during printing, see page 354.
358
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
When you select images to use in photobooks (up to 998 images) and
use EOS Utility (provided software) to transfer them to a computer, the
selected images will be copied into a dedicated folder. This function is
useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [Photobook Set-up].
Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook Set-up], then press
<0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
X An image will be displayed.
To display the three-image display,
press the <I> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
the image to be specified.
3 Select
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be specified, then press
<0>.
Repeat this step to select other
images. The number of images that
have been specified will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
To cancel the image specification,
press <0> again.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
359
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at one time.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To cancel the image specification, select
[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on
card].
Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another camera
for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings may be
overwritten.
RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
360
13
Customizing the
Camera
You can customize various camera functions to suit
your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.
Also, the current camera settings can be saved under
the Mode Dial <w> position.
The functions explained in this chapter work only in the
Creative Zone modes.
Creative
Zo
n
e
361
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
1 Select [8].
the group.
2 Select
Select C.Fn I, II, or III, then press
<0>.
Custom Function number
the Custom Function
3 Select
number.
Press the <U> key to select the
Custom Function number, then press
<0>.
the setting as desired.
4 Change
Select the desired setting (number),
then press <0>.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 if you want to set
other Custom Functions.
At the bottom of the screen, the
current Custom Function settings are
indicated below the respective
function numbers.
the setting.
5 ExitPress
the <M> button.
X The screen for step 2 will reappear.
Clearing All Custom Functions
In step 2, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to clear all the
Custom Function settings.
Even if you clear all the Custom Function settings, the [8C.Fn III-4:
Custom Controls] settings will be retained.
362
3 Custom FunctionsN
1
Exposure level increments
p.365
A LV
Shooting
k
2
ISO speed setting increments
p.365
k
C.Fn I: Exposure
3
Bracketing auto cancel
p.365
k
4
Bracketing sequence
p.366
k
5
Number of bracketed shots
p.366
k
6
Safety shift
p.367
k
k Movie
Shooting
In a
k
(Still photo,
with WB
bracketing)
C.Fn II: Autofocus
1
Tracking sensitivity
p.368
2
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
p.369
3
AI Servo 1st image priority
p.369
4
AI Servo 2nd image priority
p.370
5
AF-assist beam firing
p.371
6
Lens drive when AF impossible
p.371
With f
7
Select AF area selection mode
p.372
With f
8
AF area selection method
p.372
With f
9
Orientation linked AF point
p.373
With f
10
Manual AF point selection pattern
p.373
With f
11
AF point display during focus
p.374
12
VF display illumination
p.374
13
AF Microadjustment
p.375
With f*
With f
* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light,
the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even with c, o, and d.
The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV)
shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
363
3 Custom FunctionsN
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
1
Dial direction during Tv/Av
p.375
k
k
2
Multi function lock
p.375
k
k
3
Warnings z in viewfinder
p.376
4
Custom Controls
p.376
364
Depends on setting
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn I -1
Exposure level increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective
when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3stop increments.
With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD panel as shown below.
C.Fn I -2
ISO speed setting increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1-stop
C.Fn I -3
Bracketing auto cancel
0: On
When you set the power switch to <2>, the AEB and white balance
bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when the
flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting.
1: Off
The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if
you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash is ready to fire or if you
switch to movie shooting, AEB will be canceled temporarily, but the AEB
range will be retained.)
365
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I -4
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be
changed.
0: 09-9+
1: -909+
2: +909White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction
M/G Direction
0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
- : Decreased exposure - : Blue bias
- : Magenta bias
+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias
+ : Green bias
AEB
C.Fn I -5
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be
changed from the usual 3 shots to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [Bracketing sequence: 0] is set, the bracketed shots will be taken as
shown in the table below.
0: 3 shots
1: 2 shots
2: 5 shots
3: 7 shots
(1-stop increments)
1st Shot
2nd
Shot
3rd
Shot
+1
4th
Shot
5th
Shot
0: 3 shots
Standard (0)
-1
1: 2 shots
Standard (0)
±1
2: 5 shots
Standard (0)
-2
-1
+1
+2
3: 7 shots
Standard (0)
-3
-2
-1
+1
6th
Shot
7th
Shot
+2
+3
With setting 1, you can select the + or - amount when setting AEB.
366
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I -6
Safety shift
0: Disable
1: Shutter speed/Aperture
This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperture-priority AE
(f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure
cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will
automatically change the manually-selected setting to obtain a standard
exposure.
2: ISO speed
This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and aperturepriority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard
exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera
will automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard
exposure.
Under [z3: ISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained.
The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO
speed will be determined by the [Auto ISO range] setting (p.124).
However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto ISO range],
the safety shift will take effect up to the manually set ISO speed.
If [Shutter speed/Aperture] or [ISO speed] is set, safety shift will take
effect if necessary even when flash is used.
367
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II: Autofocus
C.Fn II -1
Tracking sensitivity
Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity during AI
Servo AF when an obstacle enters the AF points
or when the AF points stray from the subject.
0: Default setting suited for most subjects. Suited for normal, moving subjects.
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
The camera will try to continue focusing the subject even if an obstacle
enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points. The -2
setting makes the camera track the target subject longer than with the -1
setting.
However, if the camera focuses the wrong subject, it may take slightly
longer to switch and focus the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive:+1
Once an AF point tracks a subject, the camera can focus consecutive
subjects at different distances. Also effective when you want to always focus
on the closest subject. The +2 setting makes it quicker to focus the next
consecutive subject than with +1.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong subject.
[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]
in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.
368
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -2
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving
subjects whose speed can suddenly change
dramatically by starting or stopping suddenly, etc.
0: Suited for subjects that move at a fixed speed.
+2 / +1:
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/
deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving subject’s speed suddenly
changes dramatically, the camera continues to focus the target subject. For
example, for an approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to
focus behind it to avoid subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the
camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can track
dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of the
subject, the focusing may be unstable momentarily.
C.Fn II -3
AI Servo 1st image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and
shutter-release timing for the first shot during
continuous shooting with AI Servo AF.
Equal priority:
Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter release.
: Release priority
Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if focus has
not been achieved. It is effective when you want give priority to the shutter
chance rather than to focus.
: Focus priority
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus has been
achieved. Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot.
369
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -4
AI Servo 2nd image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and
shutter-release timing during continuous shooting
after the first shot with AI Servo AF.
Equal priority:
Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed. In low
light or with low-contrast subjects, shooting speed may slow down.
: Shooting speed priority
Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of achieving focus.
The continuous shooting speed does not slow down. Convenient when you
want to maintain the continuous shooting speed.
: Focus priority
Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting speed.
The picture is not taken until focus is achieved. Effective when you want to
achieve focus before capturing the shot.
370
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -5
AF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash or EOSdedicated external Speedlite.
0: Enable
The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary.
1: Disable
The AF-assist beam is not emitted. This prevents the AF-assist beam from
disturbing others.
2: Enable external flash only
The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary only if an external
Speedlite is used. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-assist
beam.
3: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only with infrared AFassist beam
will be emitted. This prevents the AF-assist light from firing as a burst of
small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED light will
not automatically turn on for AF-assist.
If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set
to [Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist
beam will not be emitted by the Speedlite.
C.Fn II -6
Lens drive when AF impossible
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera keep
searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching.
0: Continue focus search
1: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved, the
lens drive stops. This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus
due to focus searching.
Super telephoto lenses can become grossly out of focus during continuous
focus search, taking more time to achieve focus the next time. Therefore,
setting [1: Stop focus search] is recommended for super telephoto lenses.
371
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -7
Select AF area selection mode
You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your shooting
preferences. Select the mode you want to use, then press <0> to append a
checkmark <X> and select [OK].
: Manual selection: 1 pt AF
You can select one AF point.
: Manual select.: Zone AF
The 19 AF points are divided into five zones for focusing.
: Auto selection: 19 pt AF
All of the AF points are used for focusing.
The <X> mark cannot be deleted from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].
C.Fn II -8
AF area selection method
You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
0: S 9 AF area selection button
After you press the <S> or <B> button, each time you press the <B>
button, the AF area selection mode changes.
1: S 9 Main Dial
After you press the <S> or <B> button, turning the <6> dial changes
the AF area selection mode.
When [1:S 9 Main Dial] is set, use <9> to move the AF point
horizontally.
372
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -9
Orientation linked AF point
You can set the AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point
separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
0: Same for both vertical/horizontal
The same AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or
zone) are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
1: Select separate AF points
The AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or zone) can
be set separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with
the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom).
Convenient when, for instance, you want to keep using the right AF point
during all camera orientations.
When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point (or
zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will be set for the
respective orientation. Whenever you change the camera orientation, the
camera will switch to the AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF
point (or zone) set for that orientation.
C.Fn II -10
Manual AF point selection pattern
During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the outer edge
or it can move to the opposite AF point.
This works with single-point AF (manual selection) and 19-point automatic
selection AF with AI Servo AF.
0: Stops at AF area edges
Convenient if you often use an AF point along the edge.
1: Continuous
Instead of stopping at the outer edge, the selected AF point continues to the
opposite side.
373
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -11
AF point display during focus
You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following cases: 1.
When selecting the AF point(s), 2. When the camera is ready to shoot (before AF
operation), 3. During AF operation, and 4. When focus is achieved.
0: Selected (constant)
The selected AF point(s) is always displayed.
1: All (constant)
All 19 AF points are always displayed.
2: Selected (pre-AF, focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.
3: Selected (focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4.
4: Disable display
For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.
If [2: Selected (pre-AF, focused)] or [3: Selected (focused)] is set, the AF
point will not be displayed even when focus is achieved with AI Servo AF.
C.Fn II -12
VF display illumination
The AF points and grid in the viewfinder can be illuminated in red when focus is
achieved.
0: Auto
The AF points and grid are automatically illuminated in red under low light.
1: Enable
The AF points and grid are illuminated in red regardless of the ambient light
level.
2: Disable
The AF points and grid are not illuminated in red.
When AI Servo AF is set, there is no illumination in red even when focus
is achieved.
The setting here is not applied to the electronic level display (before
shooting) (p.67) in the viewfinder.
When you press the <S> or <B> button, the AF points and grid will be
illuminated in red regardless of this setting.
374
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -13
AF Microadjustment
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder shooting or
Live View shooting in the Quick mode. For details, see page 377.
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
C.Fn III -1
Dial direction during Tv/Av
0: Normal
1: Reverse direction
The dial’s turning direction for setting the shutter speed and aperture can be
reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and <5>
dials will be reversed. In the other shooting modes, the turning direction of
only the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s turning direction will be
the same for the <a> mode and for setting the exposure compensation.
C.Fn III -2
Multi function lock
When the <R> switch is set upward, it will prevent the <6> and <5>
dials and <9> from accidentally changing a setting.
Select the camera control you want to lock, then press <0> to append a
checkmark <X> and select [OK].
6: Main Dial
5 : Quick Control Dial
9 : Multi-controller
If the <R> switch is set and you try to use one of the locked
camera controls, [L] will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. Also, on the shooting function settings display (p.49), [LOCK] will
be displayed.
By default, when the <R> switch is set upward, the <5> dial will
be locked.
375
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn III -3
Warnings z in viewfinder
When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be displayed on
the viewfinder’s bottom right (p.23). The <z> icon will also appear on the
shooting function settings display (p.49).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, press <0> to
append a <X>, then select [OK].
When monochrome V is set:
If the Picture Style is set to [Monochrome] (p.127), the warning icon will
appear.
When WB is corrected:
If white balance correction is set (p.138), the warning icon will appear.
When ISO expansion is used:
If the ISO speed is set manually to H (25600) (p.120), the warning icon will
appear.
When spot metering is set:
If the metering mode is set to [Spot metering] (p.166), the warning icon will
appear.
C.Fn III -4
Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your
preferences. For details, see page 383.
376
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder
shooting or Live View shooting in the Quick mode. This is called “AF
Microadjustment”. Before making the adjustment, read “Notes for AF
Microadjustment” on page 382.
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this
adjustment only if necessary. Note that performing this
adjustment may prevent correct focusing from being
achieved.
1: Adjust All by Same Amount
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made. During AF,
regardless of the lens used, the point of focus will always be shifted by
the adjustment amount.
1
Select [C.Fn II: Autofocus].
Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn II:
Autofocus], then press <0>.
[13: AF Microadjustment].
2 Select
Select [13: AF Microadjustment],
then press <0>.
[1: All by same amount].
3 Select
Select [1: All by same amount].
the <Q> button.
4 Press
X The [1: All by same amount] screen
will appear.
377
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
the adjustment.
5 Make
Press the <U> key to make the
adjustment. The adjustable range is
±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
After making the adjustment, press
<0>.
Select [1: All by same amount], then
press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit.
the result of the
6 Check
adjustment.
Take a picture and play back the
image (p.290) to check the
adjustment result.
When the resulting picture is focused
in front of the targeted point, adjust
toward the “+: ” side. When the
resulting picture is focused behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
If necessary, do the adjustment
again.
If [1: All by same amount] is selected, AF adjustment will not be possible
for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.
378
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
2: Adjust by Lens
You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment
in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.
When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment has been registered,
the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. If you use a zoom lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle
(W) and telephoto (T) ends.
1
Select [2: Adjust by lens].
Select [2: Adjust by lens].
the <Q> button.
2 Press
X The [2: Adjust by lens] screen will
appear.
and change the lens information.
3 Check
Check the lens information.
Registered number
Press the <B> button.
X The screen will show the lens name
and a 10-digit serial number. When
the serial number is displayed, select
[OK] and go to step 4.
If the lens’ serial number cannot be
confirmed, “0000000000” will be
displayed. Enter the number as
indicated below. See the next page
about the asterisk “ * ” displayed in
front of some lens serial numbers.
379
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
Enter the serial number.
Press the <U> key to select the
digit to be entered, then press <0>
to display <r>.
Press the <V> key to enter the
number, then press <0>.
After entering all the digits, select
[OK] and press <0>.
Lens Serial Number
In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial
number, you cannot register several units of the same lens
model. Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain
displayed.
The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial
number displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a
malfunction.
If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers in
step 3.
The location of the serial number differs depending on the lens.
Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a
lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number in
step 3.
If [2: Adjust by lens] is selected and an Extender is used, the
adjustment will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.
If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After
you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you
can register another lens.
380
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
Single focal length lens
Zoom lens
the adjustment.
4 Make
For a zoom lens, press the <V> key
and select the wide-angle (W) or
telephoto (T) end. Press <0> and
the box will disappear, allowing you to
make the adjustment.
Press the <U> key to adjust as
desired, then press <0>. The
adjustable range is ±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
For a zoom lens, repeat step 4 and
adjust it for the wide-angle (W) and
telephoto (T) ends.
After completing the adjustment,
press the <M> button to return to
the screen in step 1.
Select [2: Adjust by lens], then
press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit.
the result of the adjustment.
5 Check
Take a picture and play back the
image (p.290) to check the
adjustment result.
When the resulting picture is focused
in front of the targeted point, adjust
toward the “+: ” side. When the
resulting picture is focused behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
If necessary, do the adjustment again.
381
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the
AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments
made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or
telephoto end has been adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for
the intermediate range.
Clearing All AF Microadjustments
When [ Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the
<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [1: All by same
amount] and [2: Adjust by lens].
Notes for AF Microadjustment
The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject
conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.
Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not
be achieved at the suitable position.
If you clear all the Custom Function settings (p.362), the AF
Microadjustment will be retained. However, the setting will become [0:
Disable].
It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will
shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.
Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.
For checking the adjustment result, shooting at the 73 image-recording
quality is recommended.
The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum
aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus
repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.
The AF Microadjustment will not be applied to u+ Tracking, FlexiZone Multi, and FlexiZone - Single during Live View shooting and movie
shooting.
382
8: Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences.
1
Select [C.Fn III: Operation/
Others].
Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn III:
Operation/Others], then press
<0>.
[4: Custom Controls].
2 Select
Select [4: Custom Controls], then
press <0>.
X The Custom Controls screen will
appear.
a camera button or dial.
3 Select
Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
X The name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
a function.
4 Assign
Select a function, then press <0>.
the setting.
5 ExitWhen
you press <0> to exit the
setting, the screen in step 3 will
reappear.
Press the <M> button to exit.
With the screen in step 3 displayed, you can press the <L> button to cancel
the Custom Control settings. Note that the [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls]
settings will not be canceled even if you select [8: Clear all Custom Func.
(C.Fn)].
383
8: Custom Controls
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
k
Metering and AF start
AF
AF stop
386
ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
AF point direct selection
Metering start
386
AE lock/FE lock
k
AE lock
k
AE lock (while button pressed)
Exposure
AE lock (hold)
FE lock
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
387
)
Shutter speed setting in M mode
Aperture setting in M mode
External
flash
Images
Flash exposure compensation
Image quality
Picture Style
388
388
Depth-of-field preview
IS start
Operation
VF electronic level
388
Menu display
No function (disabled)
384
8: Custom Controls
*
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
* The AF stop button (
k
) is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.
385
8: Custom Controls
: Metering and AF start
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are executed.
: AF stop
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this
function. Convenient when you want to lock the focus during AI Servo
AF.
: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold
down the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches
to AI Servo AF mode. In the AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to
One-Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button. Convenient
when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo
AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping.
: AF point direct selection
During metering, you can select an AF point directly with <9> without
pressing the <S> or <B> button.
: Metering start
When you press the shutter button halfway, only exposure metering is
performed.
: AE lock/FE lock
Normal shooting (No flash)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during the metering. Convenient when you want to
focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take
multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
With flash
During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function
will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
386
8: Custom Controls
: AE lock
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during the metering. Convenient when you want to
focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take
multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
: AE lock (while button pressed)
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter button.
: AE lock (hold)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the
button again. Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at
different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting.
: FE lock
During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function
will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <0> and turning the
<6> dial.
If Auto ISO is set, manual ISO speed setting will take effect. Auto ISO
cannot be set. If you use this function in the <a> mode, you can adjust
the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter
speed and aperture.
: Shutter speed setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the shutter speed with the
<6> or <5> dial.
: Aperture setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the aperture with the <6> or
<5> dial.
387
8: Custom Controls
: Flash exposure compensation
Press <0> to display the flash exposure compensation setting screen
(p.190) on the LCD monitor.
: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen
(p.116) on the LCD monitor.
: Picture Style
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen (p.126)
on the LCD monitor.
: Depth-of-field preview
When you press the depth-of-field preview button, the aperture will stop
down and you can check the depth of field (p.163).
: IS start
With the lens’ IS switch set to <1>, the lens’ Image Stabilizer
operates when you press the button assigned to this function (p.43).
: VF electronic level
When you press the button assigned to this function, the viewfinder will
use the AF points to display an electronic level (before shooting) and
grid (p.67).
: Menu display
Pressing <0> will display the menu on the LCD monitor.
: No function (disabled)
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
388
3 Registering My MenuN
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.
1
Select [My Menu settings].
Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu
settings], then press <0>.
[Register to My Menu].
2 Select
Select [Register to My Menu], then
press <0>.
the desired items.
3 Register
Select the item, then press <0>.
Select [OK] and press <0> to
register the item.
You can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Settings
Sort
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then
press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <V> key to change the
order, then press <0>.
Delete item/items and Delete all items
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all
registered items.
Display from My Menu
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you
display the menu screen.
389
w: Register Custom Shooting ModesN
You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode,
menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting
modes under the Mode Dial <w> position.
1
Select [Custom shooting mode (C
mode)].
Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
shooting mode (C mode)], then
press <0>.
[Register settings].
2 Select
Select [Register settings], then
press <0>.
the Custom shooting
3 Register
mode.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The current camera settings (p.391)
will be registered under the Mode Dial
<w> position.
Automatic Updating
If you change any setting while you shoot in the <w> mode, the Custom
shooting mode can be automatically updated to reflect the changed
setting(s). To enable this automatic update, in step 2, set [Auto update
set.] to [Enable]. The settings that can be automatically updated are
listed on pages 391 and 392.
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
In step 2, if you select [Clear settings], the <w> will revert to the
default setting effective before you registered the camera settings.
390
w: Register Custom Shooting ModesN
Settings Registered
Shooting Function Settings
Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, Exposure
compensation, Flash exposure compensation, AF operation, AF
point, Drive mode, Metering mode.
Menu functions
z1 Image quality, VF grid display l, Viewfinder level, Beep,
Release shutter without card, Image review
z2 Lens aberration correction (Peripheral illumination, Chromatic
aberration), Flash control, E-TTL II metering, Flash sync.
speed in Av mode, Red-eye reduction, Mirror lockup
z3 Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance,
White balance Shift/Bracketing, Color space
z4 Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO
speed NR, Highlight tone priority, Multiple exposure (options),
HDR Mode (options)
A1 Live View shooting, AF method, Continuous AF, Grid display,
Aspect ratio, Exposure simulation
A2 Silent LV shooting, Metering timer
Z1 AF method, Movie Servo AF, Silent LV shooting, Metering
timer
Z2 Grid display, Movie recording size, Digital zoom, Sound
recording, Movie recording count, Movie play count, Video
snapshot
x2 Slide show (options), Image jump with 6
x3 Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram
display, Movie play count
51
File numbering, Auto rotate
52
Auto power off, LCD brightness, LCD off/on button
53
Touch control, z button display options
54
Auto cleaning
391
w: Register Custom Shooting ModesN
C.Fn I: Exposure
Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,
Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of
bracketed shots, Safety shift
C.Fn II: Autofocus
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking, AI
Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority, AFassist beam firing, Lens drive when AF impossible, Select AF
area selection mode, AF area selection method, Orientation
linked AF point, Manual AF point selection pattern, AF point
display during focus, VF display illumination, AF
Microadjustment
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
Dial direction during Tv/Av, Multi function lock, Custom
Controls
My Menu settings will not be registered.
If the Mode Dial is set to <w>, you cannot select [54: Clear all camera
settings] and [8: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
Even when the Mode Dial is set to <w>, you can change the shooting
function settings and menu settings.
By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is
registered under <w> (p.394, 395).
392
14
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.
393
B Button Functions
When you press the <B> button
while the camera is ready to shoot, you
can display [Displays camera settings],
[Electronic level] (p.65), and [Displays
shooting functions] (p.395).
Under the [53] tab, [z button
display options] enables you to select
the options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
Select the desired display option and
press <0> to append a checkmark
<X>.
After making the selection, select
[OK], then press <0>.
Note that you cannot remove the <X> for all three display options.
The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English
for all languages.
Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will
still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press
the <B> button.
Camera Settings
Shooting mode
registered to the Mode
Dial’s <w>
<8> mode (p.81)
(p.56)
(p.377)
(p.138, 139)
(p.137)
(p.155)
(p.190)
(p.59)
(p.143)
(p.141)
(p.31, 117)
394
B Button Functions
Shooting Function Settings
White balance correction
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
Aperture
AE lock
Flash exposure compensation
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Exposure level indicator
Picture Style
Wi-Fi function
Custom Controls
AF operation
Quick Control icon
Battery check
White balance
AF point selection
Eye-Fi card transmission status
GPS acquisition status
Logging function
Drive mode
Wi-Fi transmission status
Image-recording quality
Possible shots
Max. burst/
Number of remaining
multiple exposures
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Multiple exposures/HDR/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Metering mode
White balance bracketing
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
settings (p.50).
When you press the <f>, <R>, <i>, <q>, <S>, or
<B> button, the setting screen will appear and you can use <6>,
<5>, <9>, and <B> to set the function.
If you turn off the power while the “Shooting function settings display” screen
is displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power
again. To cancel this, press the <B> button to exit from “Shooting
function settings display” screen, then turn off the power switch.
395
3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor. Each Battery
Pack LP-E6 has a unique serial number, and you can register multiple
battery packs to the camera. When you use this feature, you can check
the registered battery pack’s remaining capacity and operation history.
Select [Battery info.].
Under the [54] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
X The battery info screen will appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source being used.
The battery level icon (p.36) is displayed
together with the remaining battery capacity
shown in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the current
battery. The number is reset when the
battery is recharged.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in one of three levels.
(Green) : Battery’s recharge
performance is fine.
(Green) : Battery’s recharge performance
is slightly degraded.
(Red) : Purchasing a new battery is
recommended.
The use of a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6 is recommended. If you
use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not counted.)
The battery information will be displayed even when the LP-E6 battery pack is
in Battery Grip BG-E14. If you use size-AA/LR6 batteries, only the battery level
indicator will be displayed.
If communication with the battery is not possible or irregular for some reason,
[Use this battery?] will be displayed. If you select [OK], you can continue
shooting. However, depending on the battery, the battery info screen may not
be displayed or may not display battery info correctly.
396
3 Checking the Battery Information
Registering the Battery to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6 battery packs to the camera. To
register multiple battery packs to the camera, do the procedure below
for each battery pack.
1
Press the <B> button.
With the battery info. screen
displayed, press the <B> button.
X The battery history screen will
appear.
X If the battery has not been registered,
it will be grayed out.
[Register].
2 Select
Select [Register], then press <0>.
X The confirmation dialog will appear.
[OK].
3 Select
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The battery pack will be registered
and the battery history screen will
reappear.
X The grayed-out battery number will
now be displayed in white.
Press the <M> button. The
battery info. screen will reappear.
Battery registration is not possible if size-AA/LR6 batteries are in the
Battery Grip BG-E14 or if you use the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6.
If six battery packs have already been registered, [Register] cannot be
selected. To delete unnecessary battery information, see page 399.
397
3 Checking the Battery Information
Labeling the Serial Number on the Battery
It is convenient to label all registered Battery Pack LP-E6 with their
serial numbers, using commercially available labels.
Serial number
1
Write the serial number on a
label.
Write the serial number displayed on
the battery history screen on a label
approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6
in. in size.
7c40
0300
out the battery and affix the
2 Take
label.
Set the power switch to <2>.
Open the battery compartment cover
and remove the battery.
Affix the label as shown (side with no
electrical contacts) in the illustration.
Repeat step 2 for all of your battery
packs so you can easily see the serial
number.
Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.
If you use Battery Grip BG-E14, the label may peel off as you repeatedly
insert and remove the battery pack. If it peels off, affix a new label.
398
3 Checking the Battery Information
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack (even when
not installed) and also when it was last used.
Serial number Date last used
Look for the serial number.
Refer to the battery’s serial number
label and look for the battery’s serial
number on the battery history screen.
X You can check the respective battery
pack’s remaining capacity and the
date when it was last used.
Remaining capacity
Deleting the Registered Battery Pack Information
1
Select [Delete info.].
Follow step 2 on page 397 to select [Delete info.], then press
<0>.
2 Select the battery pack information to be deleted.
Select the battery pack information to be deleted, then press
<0>.
X <X> will appear.
To delete information for another battery pack, repeat this
procedure.
3 Press the <L> button.
X The confirmation dialog will appear.
4 Select [OK].
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The battery pack information will be deleted and the screen in
step 1 will reappear.
399
Using a Household Power Outlet
With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately), you can connect the
camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining
battery level.
1
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the
AC Adapter’s socket.
the power cord.
2 Connect
Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
the cord in the groove.
3 Place
Insert the DC Coupler’s cord carefully
without damaging the cord.
the DC Coupler.
4 Insert
Open the battery compartment cover
DC Coupler cord hole
and open the DC Coupler cord hole
cover.
Insert the DC Coupler securely until it
locks and put the cord through the
hole.
Close the cover.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the
camera’s power switch is set to <1>.
400
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of an issue
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been
approved for use in your area, please check with the card
manufacturer.
1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.31).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If you set [Disable], automatic
transmission will not occur even with
the Eye-Fi card inserted
(transmission status icon I).
401
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
the connection
4 Display
information.
Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
the picture.
6 Take
X The picture is transferred and the
<H> icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
For transferred images, O is
displayed in the shooting information
Transmission status icon
display (p.292).
H(Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.
H(Blinking) Connecting...: Connecting to access point.
H(Displayed) Connected : Connection to access point established.
H(d) Transferring...
: Image transfer to access point in progress.
402
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
If [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card is not
possible.
If “ ” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
Because of the transmission function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.
The battery power will be consumed faster.
During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi
settings] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not
appear.
403
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
Basic Zone
Function
A 7 C
Creative Zone
8
2 3 4 5 6
F
G d sf a F
All image quality settings
k k k k k k k k k*1 k*1 k k k k k
selectable
Automatically set/Auto ISO o o o o o o o o
Manual
o
Picture Automatically set/Auto o o o o o o o o
Style
Manual selection
o
ISO
speed
Ambience-based shots
Light/scene-based shots
Creative filters*2
Auto
k k
k
k k k k
o o o o
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
o
k k k
k
k k
o o o
Preset
White
Custom
balance
Color temperature setting
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer o o o o o o o o o
Peripheral illumination
Lens
k k k k k k k k k
correction
aberration
Chromatic
aberration
correction
k k k k k k k k k
correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction o o o o o o o o
Highlight tone priority
o
Multiple exposures
HDR shooting
Color
space
sRGB
o o o o o o o o o
Adobe RGB
o o o
One-Shot AF
AF
AI Focus AF
o o
o
AI Servo AF
o o o
AF area selection mode
AF point selection
o o o o o o o o o
Manual focusing (MF) k k k k k k k k k
*1: RAW+JPEG and RAW cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only for Live View shooting.
404
o k
k
o k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o k
k
k
k
k
o k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k k k k k k
k k k k k k
k
o k
k
k
k
o k
k
o k
k
k
k
o k
k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Basic Zone
Function
A 7 C
8
Creative Zone
2 3 4 5 6 F G d sf a F
o*3 o*3 *4 o*3 *4 o o*3 o k
AF Microadjustment
AF
k
Continuous AF*2 k k k k k k k k k k k
Metering Evaluative metering o o o o o o o o o o k
mode
Metering mode selection
k
Program shift
k
AE lock
k
Exposure Exposure compensation
k
AEB
k
Depth-of-field preview
k
Single shooting
k k k k k k k k k k k
AF-assist beam
Drive
High-speed
continuous shooting
Low-speed
continuous shooting
Silent single shooting
Silent continuous
shooting
10-sec. self-timer/
Remote control
2-sec. self-timer/
Remote control
Automatic firing
FE lock
Flash exposure
compensation
Wireless control
External Function settings
flash
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k k
k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k
k
k
k
Flash off
k o k
Red-eye reduction k
k
Manual firing
Built-in
flash
o *3
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k o k
k o k o
k
k
k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k k k k k
k
k
k
k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*3: If the built-in flash is set to <b>, the AF-assist beam will not be fired.
*4: If the AF method is Quick mode during Live View shooting, the external
Speedlite will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary.
*5: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
405
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
Movie
Function
Still Photos
A 7 C 8 d s f F
y
k
a
All image quality settings
selectable (movie)
All image quality settings
selectable (still photos)
k k k k k k k k k
Digital zoom
k k k k k k k k k
Video snapshots
k k k k k k k k k
k k k
ISO
speed
Automatically set/Auto ISO o
Picture
Style
Automatically set/Auto o
o o o o o o o k o o k
k
Manual
k
o o o k k k k k o k k
k k k k k
Manual selection
Auto
z*1
M y k M
k k
o o o o k k k k k o k k
Preset
k k k k k
k k
Custom
k k k k k
k k
k k k k k
k k
k k k k k
k k
White
balance Color temperature
setting
Correction
k k
Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o o o o k k k k k o k k
Peripheral illumination
Lens
k
correction
aberration
Chromatic
aberration
correction
k
correction
k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k
k
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction*2
Highlight tone priority
o o o o k k k k k o k k
k k k k k
k k
Multiple exposures
HDR shooting
Color
space
sRGB
o o o o o o o o o o k k
Adobe RGB
*1 : The z icon indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting.
*2 : Multi Shot Noise Reduction (M) cannot be set.
406
k k
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Movie
Function
k
y
AF
Still Photos
A 7 C 8 d s f F
a
z*1
M y k M
u+Tracking
k k k k k k k k k k k k
FlexiZone - Multi
k k k k k k k k k k k k
FlexiZone - Single
k k k k k k k k k k k k
Manual focusing (MF)
k k k k k k k k k k k k
Movie Servo AF
k k k k k k k k k k k k
Metering mode
o o o o o o o o o o o o
Program shift
AE lock
Exposure
Exposure
compensation
k k k k
*3
k k k k
k
*3
k
AEB
Depth-of-field preview
k k k
Single shooting
High-speed
continuous shooting
Low-speed
continuous shooting
Drive
k k k
k k k
k k k
Silent single shooting
Silent continuous
shooting
10-sec. self-timer/
Remote control *4
2-sec. self-timer/
Remote control *4
k k k
k k k
k k k
Built-in/
External Flash on
flash
Sound recording
k k k k k k k k k
Time code
k k k k k k k k k
Quick Control
k k k k k k k k k k k k
*3 : With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*4 : Works only before you start shooting a movie.
407
Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Image quality
Page
1* / 41* / 61*
73/83/74/84/7a/8a/b/c
116
VF grid display
Disable / Enable
Viewfinder level
Hide / Show
64
Beep
Enable / Touch to
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
32
Image review
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
60
66
/ Disable
59
* Not selectable in <F> or <G> mode.
* For movie shooting, [VF grid display] and [Viewfinder level] do not appear.
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /
Disable
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /
Disable
146
Flash control
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /
External flash function settings / External flash
C.Fn setting / Clear settings
195
Red-eye reduction
Disable / Enable
190
Mirror lockup
Disable / Enable
182
* For movie shooting, [Flash control] and [Red-eye reduc.] do not appear.
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
408
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Page
Exposure
compensation/AEB
1/3-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB ±3 stops)
167
168
ISO speed settings
ISO speed / ISO speed range / Auto ISO range /
Minimum shutter speed
120
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High
OFF with M or Bulb
140
White balance
Q/W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/
P (Approx. 2500 - 10000)
134
Custom white balance
Manual setting of white balance
135
White balance shift/
bracketing
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias,
9 levels each
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
single-level increments, ±3 levels
138
139
Color space
sRGB / Adobe RGB
155
* During movie shooting, [Expo.comp./AEB] will be [Exposure comp.].
z: Shooting 4 (Red)
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3
126
Long exposure noise
reduction
Disable / Auto / Enable
143
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High / Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
141
Highlight tone priority
Disable / Enable
145
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used by provided software to
delete dust spots
341
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure / Multi-expos control / No. of
exposures / Continue Multiple exposure
175
HDR Mode
Adjust dynamic range / Continuous HDR / Auto
Image Align
172
* For movie shooting, [Multiple exposure] and [HDR Mode] do not appear.
409
Menu Settings
A1: Live View shooting 1 (Red)
Page
Live View shooting
Enable / Disable
228
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single / Quick mode
233
Continuous AF
Enable / Disable
228
Touch Shutter
Enable / Disable
229
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
229
Aspect ratio
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1
229
Exposure simulation
Enable / During e / Disable
230
A2: Live View shooting 2 (Red)
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
231
Metering timer
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /
30 min.
232
Protect images
Erase-protect images
320
Rotate image
Rotate images
301
Erase images
Erase images
322
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
355
Photobook set-up
Specify images for a photobook
359
Creative filters
Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /
Art bold effect / Water painting effect /
Toy camera effect / Miniature effect
335
3: Playback 1 (Blue)
RAW image processing Process 1 images
410
328
Menu Settings
3: Playback 2 (Blue)
Page
Resize
Downsize the image’s pixel count
333
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
302
Slide show
Playback description / Display time / Repeat /
Transition effect / Background music
312
Image jump w/6
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating
297
Highlight alert
Disable / Enable
294
AF point display
Disable / Enable
294
Playback grid
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
291
Histogram display
Brightness / RGB
295
Movie play count*
Rec time / Time code
271
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
317
3: Playback 3 (Blue)
* This setting is linked to [Movie play count] under [Z2: Time code].
411
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Page
Select folder
Create and select a folder
149
File number
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
151
Auto rotate
OnzD / OnD / Off
325
Format card
Initialize and erase data on the card
57
Eye-Fi settings
Displayed when a commercially-available EyeFi card is inserted
401
Auto power off
1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. /
30 min. / Disable
59
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
LCD brightness
Seven brightness levels
324
LCD off/on button*
Remains on / Shutter button
60
Date/Time/Zone
Date (year, month, day) /
Time (hour, min., sec.) / Daylight saving time /
Time zone
37
LanguageK
Select the interface language
39
GPS device settings
Settings available when the GPS Receiver GPE2 (sold separately) is attached
-
* During movie shooting, [LCD off/on btn] does not appear.
When using GPS, be sure to check the countries and areas of use, and use
the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or
region.
412
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Page
Video system
NTSC / PAL
265
319
Feature guide
Enable / Disable
69
Touch control
Standard / Sensitive / Disable
56
z Button display
options
Displays camera settings / Electronic level /
Displays shooting functions
394
Wi-Fi
Disable / Enable
Wi-Fi function
Transfer images between cameras /
Connect to smartphone / Remote control
(EOS Utility) / Print from Wi-Fi printer /
Upload to Web service /
View images on DLNA devices
-*
* The EOS 70D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi function (Not displayed).
* For details, refer to the Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual on the DVD-ROM.
When using Wi-Fi function, be sure to check the countries and areas of
use, and use it in accordance with the laws and regulations of the
country or region.
Wi-Fi cannot be set if the camera is connected to a printer, computer,
GPS receiver or other device with an interface cable.
413
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow)
Page
Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable
Sensor cleaning
Clean now
Clean manually
Battery info.
Certification Logo
Display
Power / Remaining capacity / Shutter count /
Recharge performance / Battery registration /
Battery history
Displays some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications
340
343
396
393
Custom shooting mode Register current camera settings to the Mode
(C mode)
Dial’s <w> position
390
Clear all camera
settings
Resets the camera to the default settings
61
Copyright information
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
name / Enter copyright details / Delete
copyright information
153
z firmware ver.:*
For updating the firmware
-
* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to prevent accidental
operations.
8: Custom Functions (Orange)
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn II: Autofocus
365
Customize camera functions as desired
C.Fn III: Operation/
Others
Clear all Custom
Functions (C.Fn)
368
375
Clear all Custom Function settings
362
Register frequently-used menu options and
Custom Functions
389
9: My Menu (Green)
My Menu settings
414
Menu Settings
Movie Shooting
Z1: Movie 1 (Red)
Page
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single
273
Movie Servo AF
Enable / Disable
273
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
275
Metering timer
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /
30 min.
275
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
276
Movie recording size
1920x1080 (6 / 5 / 4) (W / X)
1280x720 (8 / 7) (W / X)
640x480 (6 / 5) (X)
265
Digital zoom
Disable / Approx. 3-10x zoom
267
Z2: Movie 2 (Red)
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Sound recording*1
Recording level
268
Wind filter: Disable / Enable
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
Time code
Count up / Start time setting /
Movie recording count / Movie play count*2 /
Drop frame
270
Video snapshot: Enable / Disable
Video snapshot
Album settings: Create a new album /
Add to existing album
277
*1: In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will be [On]
or [Off].
*2: The setting is linked to [x3: Movie play count].
415
System Map
ST-E2 ST-E3-RT 270EX II
90EX
320EX
430EX II 600EX-RT/ Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite
MR-14EX
MT-24EX
600EX
Bundled
Accessories
Eyecup Eb
Eyepiece Extender
EP-EX15
Rubber Frame Eb
Wide Strap
EW-EOS70D
E-series Dioptric
Adjustment Lenses
Angle Finder C
Battery Pack
LP-E6
Battery Charger
LC-E6 or LC-E6E
AC Adapter DC Coupler
AC-E6
DR-E6
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-E6
Battery Grip
BG-E14
Car Battery
Cable CB-570
Car Battery
Charger
CBC-E6
Battery Magazine
Battery Magazine
BGM-E14L for LP-E6
BGM-E14A for
Hand Strap (attached to BG-E14) size-AA/LR6 batteries
E2
(attached to BG-E14)
416
System Map
GPS Receiver
GP-E2
Remote
Controller
RC-6
Remote
Switch
RS-60E3
EF lenses
EF-S lenses
External microphone
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
TV/Video
EOS Solution Disk
PictBridge-compatible printer
Interface Cable
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
Interface Cable IFC-200U/IFC-500U
(1.9 m/6.2 ft./4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
USB port
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card
Computer
Card reader
Card slot
Leather Case EH21-L
Windows 8
Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Mac OS X
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
* Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E7 is not compatible with
the EOS 70D (W, N).
417
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery pack does not recharge.
If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not
be recharged (p.396).
Do not recharge any battery pack other than genuine Canon Battery
Pack LP-E6.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
If (1) the battery charger or battery pack has a problem or (2)
communication with the battery pack failed (with a non-Canon battery pack),
the protection circuit will stop the charging and the lamp will blink in orange
at high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the
power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery pack to the charger. Wait a
few minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the
problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
If the internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the charger is
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp off).
During the charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for any
reason, the charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the
battery temperature goes down, the charging will resume automatically.
The camera does not operate even when the power
switch is set to <1>.
Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.30).
Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.30).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.31).
Recharge the battery (p.28).
418
Troubleshooting Guide
The access lamp still blinks even when the
power switch is set to <2>.
If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,
the access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds.
When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off
automatically.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.28).
The battery performance may have degraded. See [54: Battery info.]
to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.396). If the
battery performance is poor, replace the battery pack with a new one.
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’ Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
• The Eye-Fi card’s transmission is enabled.
The camera turns off by itself.
Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.59).
Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s
power does not turn off.)
419
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.40).
The viewfinder is dark.
Install a recharged battery pack in the camera (p.28).
No images can be shot or recorded.
Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.31).
Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the write/erase position (p.31).
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.31, 322).
If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode while the focus
confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be
taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically,
or focus manually (p.45, 110).
The card cannot be used.
If a card error message is displayed, see page 33 or 432.
420
Troubleshooting Guide
The image is out of focus.
Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.40).
To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.44, 45).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.160), set a higher ISO speed (p.120), use flash (p.188, 193),
or use a tripod.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the
AI Servo AF mode, or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF mode
(p.75).
AF speed changes depending on lenses used.
If the AF method is set to [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or
[FlexiZone - Single] for Live View shooting or movie shooting, the AF
control method (phase-difference detection with the image sensor or
contrast detection) will switch automatically depending on the lens
used and functions selected, such as movie digital zoom or magnified
view. This can greatly affect the AF speed and the camera may take a
longer time to focus.
With FlexiZone - Multi, it takes longer to focus.
Depending on the shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus the
subject. Use FlexiZone - Single or focus manually.
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
Depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, etc., the continuous shooting speed may become slower.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
If you shoot something that has fine detail (such as a field of grass),
the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number mentioned on page 117.
421
Troubleshooting Guide
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
When [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], ISO 100/125/
160 can be set (p.145).
If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO
speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800 (or up to ISO 6400 for movie
shooting). Even if you expand the settable ISO speed range in [ISO
speed range], you cannot set expanded ISO speeds (H).
The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.
If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the Auto Lighting
Optimizer cannot be set. When [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to
[Disable], then the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.145).
Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
Set [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come
out bright (p.140).
The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.
When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the
multiple-exposure image will be recorded in 1 quality (p.181).
When I use the <f> mode with flash,
the shutter speed becomes slow.
If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z2: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] (p.196).
422
Troubleshooting Guide
The built-in flash is raised by itself.
In shooting modes (<A><C><2><4><6>) whose default setting
is <a> (Auto flash), the built-in flash will rise automatically when
necessary.
The built-in flash does not fire.
If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the
flash may stop operating to protect the flash unit.
The external flash does not fire.
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [A2:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.231).
The external flash always fires at full output.
If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.194).
When the external Speedlite’s [Flash metering mode] Custom
Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash), the flash will always be fired at full
output (p.202).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set for the external Speedlite.
If flash exposure compensation has already been set with the external
Speedlite, flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the
camera. When the external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation
is canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with
the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
Under [z2: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to
[Auto] (p.196).
The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.
The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
423
Troubleshooting Guide
The shutter makes two shooting sounds during
Live View shooting.
If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot
(p.217).
During Live View and movie shooting, a white <
red <E> icon is displayed.
> or
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
< > icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or
movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.249, 287).
I cannot shoot a movie.
If [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], movie shooting is not possible. Before
shooting movies, set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable].
Movie shooting stops by itself.
If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. If the compression method is set to [IPB], use a card
with a reading/writing speed of at least 6 MB per sec. If the
compression method is set to [ALL-I] (I-only), use a card with a
reading/writing speed of at least 20 MB per sec. (p.3). To find out the
card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website.
If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set
automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO speed
(p.257).
424
Troubleshooting Guide
The manually set ISO speed changes when switching to movie shooting.
If you shoot a movie when [Maximum: H (25600)] is set with [ISO
speed range] and ISO speed is set to “H” (25600), the ISO speed will
switch to “H” (12800) (during movie shooting with manual exposure).
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to the original setting.
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’ maximum aperture changes
or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning)
or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting.
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other light sources during
movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color
tone may be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed may
solve the problem.
When I shoot still photos during movie shooting,
the movie shooting stops.
Setting a lower image quality for still photos and shooting fewer
continuous still photos may resolve the problem.
Time code is off.
Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code. When you want to edit a movie using
time code, it is recommended not to shoot still photos during movie shooting.
425
Troubleshooting Guide
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi cannot be set.*
If the camera is connected to a printer, computer, GPS receiver, or
other device with an interface cable, Wi-Fi cannot be set ([53: Wi-Fi]
will be grayed out). Disconnect the interface cable, then set the Wi-Fi.
For details, refer to the Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual.
* The EOS 70D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi function.
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the <6> dial, <5> dial,
or <9>.
Set the <R> switch downward (lock release, p.48).
Check the [8C.Fn III-2: Multi function lock] setting (p.375).
The camera button/dial’s function has changed.
Check the [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls] setting (p.383).
During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly
sounds softer.
Check if your finger is blocking the speaker (p.20).
Touch screen operation is not possible.
Check if [53: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]
(p.56).
426
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows few tabs and options.
In Basic Zone modes, certain tabs and menu options are not
displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative Zone mode (p.52).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.155).
The file name starts with “MVI_”.
It is a movie file (p.152).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may
not start from 0001 (p.151).
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
Make sure the correct date and time has been set (p.37).
Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.37, 38).
The date and time is not in the picture.
The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date
and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting
information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the
picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information
(p.351, 355).
[###] is displayed.
If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera
can display, [###] will be displayed (p.303).
427
Troubleshooting Guide
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.401).
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
[33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.294).
A red box is displayed on the image.
[33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.294).
The image cannot be erased.
If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.320).
The movie cannot be played back.
Movies edited with a computer using the provided ImageBrowser EX
(p.457) or other software cannot be played back with the camera.
However, video snapshot albums edited with EOS Video Snapshot
Task (p.286) can be played on the camera.
428
Troubleshooting Guide
When the movie is played back, camera operation
noise can be heard.
If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external microphone
(commercially available) is recommended (p.269).
The movie has still moments.
During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. If this happens, shoot with the <a> shooting mode (p.256).
No image appears on the TV screen.
Make sure the HDMI cable or stereo AV cable’s plug is inserted all the
way in (p.316, 319).
Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system as
the TV set (p.319).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.266).
My card reader does not recognize the card.
Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards
may not be correctly recognized. If this occurs, connect your camera
to the computer with the interface cable, then transfer the images to
your computer using EOS Utility (provided software, p.457).
429
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot process the RAW image.
41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera. Use
the provided software Digital Photo Professional to process the image
(p.457).
I cannot resize the image.
c JPEG images and 1/41/61 images cannot be resized
with the camera (p.333).
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no
picture is taken (p.340).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.35).
Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than listed in the
instruction manual.
What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.350).
Direct printing does not work.
If [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], direct printing is not possible. Set [WiFi] to [Disable], then connect the camera to the printer with an
interface cable.
430
Troubleshooting Guide
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot transfer images to a personal computer.
Install the provided software (EOS Solution Disk CD-ROM) on the
computer (p.457).
If [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected to a
computer. Set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable], then connect the camera to the
computer with an interface cable.
431
Error Codes
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
Number
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
01
Î Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
lens, or remove and install the battery pack again (p.19, 20, 30).
Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card
with camera.
02
Î Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.31, 57).
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.
04
Î Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.31, 57, 322).
05
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on
again.
06
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
Î Operate the power switch (p.35).
Î Operate the power switch (p.35).
An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
Î Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack
again, or use a Canon lens (p.30, 35).
* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your
nearest Canon Service Center.
432
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Lens mount:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in
flash
SD memory card, SDHC memory card*, SDXC memory
card*
* UHS-I cards compatible.
Approx. 22.5 x 15.0mm
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
* Excluding EF-M lenses
(35mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the
lens focal length)
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
CMOS sensor
Approx. 20.20 megapixels
3:2
Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Recorded pixels:
Create/select a folder:
File numbering:
Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original), RAW+JPEG
simultaneous recording possible
L (Large)
: Approx. 20.00 megapixels (5472 x 3648)
M (Medium) : Approx. 8.90 megapixels (3648 x 2432)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 5.0 megapixels (2736 x 1824)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: Approx. 20.0 megapixels (5472 x 3648)
M-RAW
: Approx. 11.0 megapixels (4104 x 2736)
S-RAW
: Approx. 5.0 megapixels (2736 x 1824)
Possible
Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3
433
Specifications
White balance:
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration
correction:
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature
setting (approx. 2500-10000 K), White balance correction,
and White balance bracketing possible
* Flash color temperature information transmission enabled
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction
• Viewfinder
Type:
Coverage:
Magnification:
Eye point:
Built-in dioptric
adjustment:
Focusing screen:
Grid display:
Electronic level:
Mirror:
Depth-of-field preview:
Eye-level pentaprism
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 98% (with Eye point approx.
22mm)
Approx. 0.95x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Approx. 22mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Fixed
Provided
Displayable before and during shooting
Quick-return type
Provided
• Autofocus
Type:
TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
AF points:
19 (All cross-type focusing*)
* Except with certain lenses.
Focusing brightness
EV -0.5 - 18 (with center AF point, at room temperature,
range:
ISO 100)
Focus operation:
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual
focusing (MF)
AF area selection mode: Single-point AF (Manual selection), Zone AF (Manual
zone selection), 19-point automatic selection AF
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking
AI Servo AF
characteristics:
AF fine adjustment:
AF Microadjustment (All lenses by same amount or
Adjust by lens)
AF-assist beam:
Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash
434
Specifications
• Exposure Control
Metering modes:
Metering brightness
range:
Exposure control:
ISO speed:
(Recommended
exposure index)
ISO speed settings:
Exposure
compensation:
AE lock:
63-zone TTL full-aperture metering
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 7.7% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 3.0% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative
Auto, Special scene [Portrait, Landscape, Close-up,
Sports, Night Portrait, Handheld Night Scene, HDR
Backlight Control], Program), Shutter-priority AE,
Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure, Bulb exposure
Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically
* Landscape: ISO 100 - ISO 1600 set automatically,
Handheld Night Scene: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
automatically
P, Tv, Av, M, B: Auto ISO, ISO 100 - ISO 12800 (in 1/3or whole-stop increments), or ISO expansion to H
(equivalent to ISO 25600)
ISO speed range, Auto ISO range, and Auto ISO
minimum shutter speed settable
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
AEB:
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
Auto:
Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: By AE lock button
• HDR Shooting
Dynamic range
adjustment:
Auto image align:
Auto, ±1 EV, ±2 EV, ±3 EV
Possible
• Multiple Exposures
Number of multiple
exposures:
Multiple-exposure
control:
2 to 9 exposures
Additive, Average
• Shutter
Type:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
435
Specifications
Shutter speeds:
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range;
available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync
at 1/250 sec.
• Drive System
Drive modes:
Continuous shooting
speed:
Max. burst:
Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting, Lowspeed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting, Silent
continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote control,
2-sec. self-timer/remote control
High-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec.
Low-speed continuous shooting : Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
Silent continuous shooting
: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 40 shots (approx. 65 shots)
RAW: Approx. 15 shots (approx. 16 shots)
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 8 shots (approx. 8 shots)
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO
100 and Standard Picture Style) and an 8 GB card.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible 8
GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.
• Flash
Built-in flash:
External Speedlite:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Flash control:
Retractable, auto pop-up flash
Guide No.: Approx.12/39.4 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)
Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view
Recycling time approx. 3 sec.
Compatible with EX-series Speedlites
E-TTL II autoflash
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
None
Built-in flash function settings, external Speedlite function
settings, external Speedlite Custom Function settings
Wireless flash control via optical transmission
• Live View Shooting
Aspect ratio:
Focus methods:
436
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Dual Pixel CMOS AF system/Contrast-detection AF
system (Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-Multi, FlexiZoneSingle), Phase-difference detection with the dedicated
AF sensor (Quick mode), Manual focus (approx. 5x and
10x magnified view possible for focus check)
Specifications
Continuous AF:
Focusing brightness
range:
Metering modes:
Metering brightness
range:
Creative filters:
Silent shooting:
Touch shutter:
Grid display:
Provided
EV 0-18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 10.3% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.6% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)
Provided
Three types
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
Audio:
Recording size
and frame rate:
Compression method:
File size:
Focusing:
Digital zoom:
Metering modes:
Metering brightness
range:
MOV
MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
Linear PCM
1920x1080 (Full HD): 30p/25p/24p
1280x720 (HD)
: 60p/50p
640x480 (SD)
: 30p/25p
* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.98 fps,
60p: 59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps
ALL-I (I-only), IPB
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) / IPB : Approx. 235 MB/min.
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) / ALL-I : Approx. 685 MB/min.
1280x720 (60p/50p) / IPB
: Approx. 205 MB/min.
1280x720 (60p/50p) / ALL-I
: Approx. 610 MB/min.
640x480 (30p/25p) / IPB
: Approx. 78 MB/min.
* Card reading/writing speed necessary for movie shooting:
IPB: at least 6 MB per sec./ALL-I: at least 20 MB per sec.
Same as focusing with Live View shooting
* Quick mode disabled during movie shooting
Approx. 3x-10x
Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focus method.
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
437
Specifications
Exposure control:
Exposure
compensation:
ISO speed:
(Recommended
exposure index)
Time code:
Drop frames:
Video snapshots:
Sound recording:
Grid display:
Still photo shooting:
Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movies) and
manual exposure
±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (±5 stops for still photos)
For autoexposure shooting: 1. ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
automatically. In Creative Zone modes, the upper limit is
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 12800).
For manual exposure shooting: Auto ISO (ISO 100 - ISO
6400 set automatically), ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
manually (1/3- and whole-stop increments), expandable
to H (equivalent to ISO 12800)
Supported
Compatible with 60p/30p
Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Built-in stereo microphone, external stereo microphone
terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Three types
Possible
• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Electronic level:
Interface languages:
Touch screen
technology:
Feature guide / Help:
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Wide 7.7 cm (3.0-in) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Manual (7 levels)
Provided
25
Capacitive sensing
Displayable
• Playback
Image display formats:
Highlight alert:
AF point display:
Grid display:
Zoom magnification:
Image browsing
methods:
Image rotate:
438
Single image display, Single image + Info display (Basic
info, shooting info, histogram), 4-image index, 9-image
index
Overexposed highlights blink
Possible
Three types
Approx. 1.5x - 10x
Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting
date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Possible
Specifications
Rating:
Movie playback:
Slide show:
Background music:
Image protect:
Provided
Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT),
built-in speaker
All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by
rating
Selectable for slide shows and movie playback
Possible
• Post-Processing of Images
In-camera RAW image
processing:
Resize:
Creative filters:
Brightness correction, White balance, Picture Style, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,
JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Peripheral
illumination correction, Distortion correction, Chromatic
aberration correction
Possible
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
• Direct Printing
Compatible printers:
Printable images:
Print ordering:
PictBridge-compatible printers
JPEG and RAW images
DPOF Version 1.1 compatible
• Custom Functions
Custom Functions:
My Menu registration:
Custom shooting
modes:
Copyright information:
23
Possible
Register under Mode Dial C
Entry and inclusion enabled
• Interface
Audio/video OUT/Digital Analog video (Compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio
terminal:
output
Computer communication, Direct printing (Hi-Speed
USB or equivalent), GPS Receiver GP-E2 connection
HDMI mini OUT
Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
terminal:
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Remote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Compatible
439
Specifications
• Power
Battery:
Battery Pack LP-E6 (Quantity 1)
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6.
* With Battery Grip BG-E14 attached, size-AA/LR6
batteries can be used.
Battery information:
Remaining capacity, Shutter count, Recharge
performance, and Battery registration possible
With viewfinder shooting:
Number of possible
Approx. 920 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
shots:
(Based on CIPA testing approx. 850 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting:
standards)
Approx. 210 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 200 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
Movie shooting time:
Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6.
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 139.0 x 104.3 x 78.5 mm / 5.5 x 4.1 x 3.1 in.
Weight (EOS 70D (W)): Approx. 755 g / 26.7 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),
approx. 675 g / 23.8 oz. (Body only)
Weight (EOS 70D (N)): Approx. 750 g / 26.5 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),
approx. 670 g / 23.7 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
• Battery Pack LP-E6
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated voltage:
7.2 V DC
Battery capacity:
1800 mAh
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 38.4 x 21.0 x 56.8 mm / 1.5 x 0.8 x 2.2 in.
Weight:
Approx. 80g / 23.6 oz.
• Battery Charger LC-E6
Compatible battery:
Recharging time:
Rated input:
Rated output:
440
Battery Pack LP-E6
Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
8.4 V DC / 1.2 A
Specifications
Working temperature
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
range:
Working humidity:
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 1.5 x 0.8 x 3.7 in.
Weight:
Approx. 130g / 23.6 oz.
• Battery Charger LC-E6E
Compatible battery:
Power cord length:
Recharging time:
Rated input:
Rated output:
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Weight:
Battery Pack LP-E6
Approx. 1 m / 3.3 ft.
Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
8.4 V DC / 1.2 A
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
85% or less
Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.
Approx. 125 g / 4.4 oz. (excluding power cord)
• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
Angle of view:
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 23°20’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 15°40’
Lens construction:
13 elements in 11 groups
Minimum aperture:
f/22 - 36
Closest focusing distance: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (from image sensor plane)
Max. magnification:
0.36x (at 55 mm)
Field of view:
199 x 129 - 63 x 42 mm / 7.83 x 5.08 - 2.48 x 1.65 in. (at
0.25 m / 0.82 ft.)
Image Stabilizer:
Lens shift type
Filter size:
58 mm
Lens cap:
E-58 II
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 69.0 x 75.2 mm / 2.72 x 2.96 in.
Weight:
Approx. 205 g / 7.2 oz.
Hood:
EW-63C (sold separately)
Case:
LP1016 (sold separately)
• EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
Angle of view:
Lens construction:
Minimum aperture:
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 11°30’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 9°30’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 6°20’
16 elements in 12 groups
f/22 - 36
441
Specifications
Closest focusing
distance*:
At 18 mm focal length: 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.
(Approx. 372 x 248 mm / 14.6 x 9.8 in. field of view)
At 135 mm focal length: 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.
(Approx. 80 x 53 mm / 3.1 x 2.1 in. field of view)
* Distance from image sensor plane
Max. magnification:
0.28x (at 135 mm)
Image Stabilizer:
Lens shift type
Filter size:
67 mm
Lens cap:
E-67 II
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 76.6 x 96.0 mm / 3.0 x 3.8 in.
Weight:
Approx. 480 g / 16.9 oz.
Hood:
EW-73B (sold separately)
Case:
LP1116 (sold separately)
• EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
Angle of view:
Lens construction:
Minimum aperture:
Closest focusing
distance:
Max. magnification:
Field of view:
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 7°50’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 6°30’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 4°20’
16 elements in 12 groups
f/22 - 36
0.45 m / 1.48 ft. (From image sensor plane)
0.24x (at 200 mm)
452 x 291 - 93 x 62 mm / 17.8 x 11.5 - 3.7 x 2.4 in. (at
0.45 m / 1.48 ft.)
Image Stabilizer:
Lens shift type
Filter size:
72 mm
Lens cap:
E-72 II
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 78.6 x 102.0 mm / 3.1 x 4.0 in.
Weight:
Approx. 595 g / 21.0 oz.
Hood:
EW-78D (sold separately)
Case:
LP1116 (sold separately)
All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on
CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
442
Handling Precautions: EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM,
EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
The kit lenses use a stepping motor that drives the focus lens. The
motor controls the focus lens even during zooming.
1. When the camera is OFF
The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the
camera is OFF due to the auto power off function. Therefore, users
must be aware of the following points.
Manual focusing is not possible.
During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.
2. When the lens is in sleep mode
If not operated for a certain period of time, this lens will enter sleep
mode in order to save power, apart from the camera’s auto power off.
To exit sleep mode, press the shutter button halfway.
In sleep mode, the motor will not operate even if the camera is ON.
Therefore, users must be aware of the following points.
Manual focusing is not possible.
During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.
3. During initial reset
When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON by
pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF due to
the auto power off function*1, the lens performs an initial reset of the
focus lens.
Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus
during the initial reset, this is not a malfunction.
Wait approx. 1 second*2 after the initial reset has completed
before shooting.
*1: Applicable to the following EF-S lens compatible digital SLR cameras:
EOS 7D, EOS 60D, EOS 60Da, EOS 50D, EOS 40D, EOS 30D, EOS 20D,
EOS 20Da, EOS 600D, EOS 550D, EOS 500D, EOS 450D, EOS 1100D,
EOS 1000D, EOS 400D DIGITAL, EOS 350D DIGITAL, EOS 300D DIGITAL
*2: The initial reset time varies depending on the camera used.
443
Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories
(e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this
warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable
basis.
Battery Pack LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
444
Safety Warnings
Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death,
and material damage.
Preventing Serious Injury or Death
• To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the
safeguards below:
- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this
booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do
not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose
the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery
pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.
- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not
mix new and old or different types of batteries.
- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range
of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.
- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a
physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)
• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts
with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent
fire or an explosion.
• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging
and prevent a fire.
• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or
fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.
• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord
can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.
• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. The use of a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.
• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away.
445
• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and
disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and
fire.
• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or fire.
• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do
not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.
• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.
Doing so may damage your vision.
• Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally
choke the child.
• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and
electrical shock.
• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
- Always insert the power plug all the way in.
- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.
Also do not twist or tie the cords.
- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.
• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around
the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet
may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.
446
Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage
• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The
equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.
• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap
heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera,
promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and
electrical shock.
• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so
may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up
battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.
• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
If the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact
your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.
447
Only for European Union and EEA
(Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery
Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation
implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol
shown above, in accordance with the Battery
Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium,
Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above
an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on
an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an
authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this
type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your
local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste
disposal service or visit
www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
448
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains important safety
and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC-E6 & LC-E6E.
2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on
(1) the charger, (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery
pack.
3. CAUTION — To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E6.
Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and other
damage.
4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.
5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in
fire, electric shock, or personal injury.
6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than
by cord when disconnecting charger.
7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them
immediately.
9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,
or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified serviceman.
10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified serviceman when
service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of
electric shock or fire.
11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet before
attempting any maintenance or cleaning.
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION
Unless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user serviceable parts
inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
449
450
15
Viewing the DVD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
This chapter explains how to view the Camera and
Software Instruction Manuals (on the DVD-ROM
provided) on your computer, download images from the
camera to your computer, gives an overview of the
software in the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and
explains how to install the software on your computer.
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
EOS Camera
Instruction Manuals
Disk
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
EOS Solution
Disk
(Software)
451
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
The EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
contains the following electronic manuals (PDF):
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
Instruction Manual
Explains all the camera functions and procedures, including basic
content.
Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual
Explains all the Wi-Fi functions and procedures, including basic
content.
Software Instruction Manuals
Software Instruction Manuals PDFs for the software supplied on the
EOS Solution Disk (see p.457-459).
452
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
[WINDOWS]
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk
Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to
your computer.
1
Insert the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD) into the
DVD-ROM drive of your computer.
2
Double-click [My Computer] on the desktop and then double-click
the DVD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk.
3
Click on the name of the instruction manual you want to view.
Select your language and operating system.
X The index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed.
B
EOS 70D (W)
EOS 70D (N)
ENGLISH
The EOS 70D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi functions explained in
this manual.
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Instruction Manual
Adobe Reader (latest version recommended) must be installed to view the Instruction
Manual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your
computer.
To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe
Reader. For more information about how to use Adobe Reader, see Adobe Reader’s
Help menu.
The Instruction Manual PDF incorporates page links so you can quickly go to the
desired page. On the Contents or Index page, just click on the page number to jump
to that page.
453
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
[MACINTOSH]
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk
Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to
your computer.
1
Insert the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD) into the
DVD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.
2
3
4
Double-click on the disk icon.
Double-click the START.html file.
Click on the name of the instruction manual you want to view.
Select your language and operating system.
X The index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed.
B
EOS 70D (W)
EOS 70D (N)
ENGLISH
The EOS 70D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi functions explained in
this manual.
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Instruction Manual
Adobe Reader (latest version recommended) must be installed to view the Instruction
Manual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your
Macintosh.
To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe
Reader. For more information about how to use Adobe Reader, see Adobe Reader’s
Help menu.
The Instruction Manual PDF incorporates page links so you can quickly go to the
desired page. On the Contents or Index page, just click on the page number to jump
to that page.
454
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use the provided software to download the images in the
camera to your computer. There are two ways to do this.
Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1
Install the software (p.458).
the provided interface cable
2 Use
to connect the camera to your
computer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
Connect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
EOS Utility to transfer the
3 Use
images.
For details, refer to the Software
Instruction Manual PDF on the DVDROM (p.453).
If [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], the images cannot be downloaded to a
computer. Set it to [Disable], then connect the interface cable.
455
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to download images/movies to a computer.
Install the software (p.458).
1
the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.
Canon software to download
3 Use
the images.
X Use Digital Photo Professional.
X Use ImageBrowser EX.
For details, refer to the Software
Instruction Manual PDF on the DVDROM (p.453).
When downloading images from the camera to your computer, with a card
reader without using Canon software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to
your computer.
456
About the Software
EOS Solution Disk
EOS Solution Disk XXX
This disk contains various software for EOS cameras.
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
Note that the software provided with previous cameras might not support
still photos and movie files shot with this camera. Please use the software
provided with this camera.
a EOS Utility
Communication Software for the Camera and Computer
You can download images (still images/movies) you have shot with the camera to
your computer.
You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer.
You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your computer.
You can copy background music tracks to the card, and play the background music
during playback.
b Digital Photo Professional
Image Viewing and Editing Software
You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at high-speed.
You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.
Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals. It is especially
recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.
c ImageBrowser EX
Image Viewing and Editing Software
You can view, browse and print JPEG images on your computer.
You can play movies (MOV files), video snapshot albums, and extract still photos from
movies.
You can download additional functions, such as EOS Video Snapshot Task
(9?), with an internet connection.
Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first time and
amateur users.
d Picture Style Editor
Picture Style File Creating Software
This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing
images.
You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and create/save an
original Picture Style file.
457
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Windows
Compatible OS
1
Windows 8
Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.
Never connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD).
3
4
Select your geographic area, country and language.
Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation
procedure.
If prompted, install Microsoft Silverlight.
5
Click [Finish] when the installation has completed.
6
Remove the CD.
458
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Macintosh
Compatible OS
MAC OS X 10.6 - 10.8
1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.
2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD).
On your computer’s desktop, double-click and open the CD-ROM
icon, and then double-click [Canon EOS Digital Installer].
3 Select your geographic area, country and language.
4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation
procedure.
5
Click [Restart] when the installation has completed.
6 Once the computer has restarted, remove the CD.
459
Index
Numerics
ALL-I (I-only) ................................ 265
10- or 2-sec. self-timer..................113
Ambience-based shots................... 92
1280x720 ......................................265
Aperture-priority AE...................... 162
1920x1080 ....................................265
Art bold effect ....................... 226, 337
19-point AF auto selection ............103
Aspect ratio .................................. 229
4- or 9-image index display...........296
Attenuator..................................... 268
640x480 ........................................265
Auto Lighting Optimizer................ 140
A
Auto playback............................... 312
A (Scene Intelligent Auto)............72
Auto power off .......................... 35, 59
AC Adapter Kit ..............................400
Auto reset..................................... 152
Access lamp ...................................32
Auto rotate.................................... 325
Accessories ......................................4
Adobe RGB...................................155
AE lock..........................................170
AEB
(Auto Exposure Bracketing)..168, 365
AF
AF area selection mode ...........103
AF method........................233, 273
AF Microadjustment .................377
AF operation.............................100
AF point ....................................103
AF point selection.............105, 386
AF-assist beam ................102, 371
Automatic selection ..........103, 107
Beep (Beeper) ............................59
Difficulty focusing .............109, 241
Manual focusing (MF).......110, 247
Out of focus ..................43, 44, 241
Recomposing .............................75
AF area selection mode................103
Autofocus 9 AF
Automatic selection of
AF point................................ 103, 107
Av (Aperture-priority AE) .............. 162
A/V OUT
(Audio/video output) ..... 306, 316, 319
B
B (Bulb) ........................................ 171
Background music........................ 315
Basic Zone modes ......................... 24
Battery................................ 28, 30, 36
Battery Grip ............................ 36, 416
Beep (Beeper)................................ 59
Black-and-white image... 92, 127, 131
Bracketing ............................ 139, 168
Bulb exposures ............................ 171
C
C (Custom shooting) .................... 390
AF point ........................................103
C (Creative Auto)......................... 78
AF-ON (AF start) button..................45
Cable................ 4, 316, 319, 416, 455
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)..............102
Camera
Camera shake ......................... 182
Clearing the camera settings ..... 61
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ........75, 101
Tracking sensitivity ...........368, 369
460
Index
Holding the camera ....................44
Settings display ........................394
Cards ..............................3, 19, 31, 57
Card reminder.............................32
Formatting ..................................57
Low-level formatting ...................58
Problems ..............................33, 58
Write-protect switch ....................31
Center-weighted average
metering ........................................166
DC Coupler................................... 400
Charger .....................................26, 28
Direct selection (of AF point) ........ 386
Chromatic aberration correction....147
DPOF ........................................... 355
Cleaning (image sensor)...............339
Dragging......................................... 55
Clearing the camera settings ..........61
Drive mode ............................. 80, 111
Close-up..........................................84
Dust Delete Data .......................... 341
Color space...................................155
Depth-of-field preview .. 163, 216, 221
Dials
Main Dial .................................... 46
Mode Dial............................. 24, 46
Quick Control Dial ...................... 47
DIGITAL (USB) terminal ....... 346, 455
Dioptric adjustment......................... 44
Direct printing ............................... 346
E
Color temperature .................134, 137
Electronic level ....................... 65, 388
Color tone .....................................130
Erasing images............................. 322
Continuous file numbering ............151
Error codes................................... 432
Continuous shooting .....................111
Evaluative metering...................... 165
Contrast ........................................130
exFAT ............................................. 58
Copyright information....................153
Exposure compensation............... 167
Creative Auto ..................................78
Exposure level increments ........... 365
Creative filters .......................224, 335
Exposure level indicator ......... 23, 395
M (Creative Zone) icon....................8
Exposure simulation ..................... 230
Creative Zone modes......................24
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Cropping (for printing) ...................353
Eyecup ......................................... 183
Cross-type focusing ......................108
Eye-Fi cards ................................. 401
Custom Controls .....................51, 383
Eyepiece cover............................... 27
Custom Functions .........................362
F
Custom shooting modes ...............390
FE lock ................................. 192, 193
Custom white balance...................135
Feature guide ................................. 69
D
FEB (flash exposure bracketing) .. 201
Date/Time .......................................37
File extension ............................... 152
Daylight saving time........................38
File name...................................... 151
461
Index
File size.........................117, 266, 292
G
Filter effects ..........................131, 335
GPS.............................................. 412
Final image simulation ..........221, 260
Grainy B/W........................... 226, 336
Fine
(image-recording quality) ......117, 118
Grid display .................. 229, 276, 291
Firmware version ..........................414
First-curtain synchronization.........200
Fish-eye effect ......................226, 337
Flash (Speedlite)
Built-in flash..............................188
Custom Functions ....................202
Effective range .........................189
External flash............................193
FE lock .............................192, 193
Flash control.............................195
Flash exposure
compensation ...........190, 193, 201
Flash mode...............................199
Flash off................................77, 80
Flash sync contacts ....................20
Flash sync speed .....................194
Manual flash .....................199, 213
Red-eye reduction ....................190
Shutter synchronization (1st/2nd
curtain) .....................................200
Wireless....................................200
Focus confirmation light..................72
Focus lock.......................................75
Focus mode switch .........40, 110, 247
Focusing 9 AF, Manual focusing
Folder creation/selection...............149
Formatting (card initialization).........57
Frame rate ....................................265
Full High-Definition
(Full HD) ...............251, 265, 306, 316
Function availability by shooting
mode.............................................404
462
H
Handheld Night Scene ................... 87
HD ................................ 265, 306, 316
HDMI .................................... 306, 316
HDMI CEC ................................... 317
HDR ............................................. 172
HDR Backlight Control ................... 88
Help................................................ 70
High ISO speed noise reduction .. 141
High-Definition (HD)
movies.......................... 265, 306, 316
Highlight alert ............................... 294
Highlight detail loss ...................... 294
Highlight tone priority ................... 145
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)........ 295
Hot shoe................................. 20, 193
Household power ......................... 400
I
ICC profile .................................... 155
Illumination (LCD panel)................. 49
Image conversion factor................. 42
Image dust prevention.................. 339
Image review time .......................... 60
Image Stabilizer (lens).................... 43
Image-recording quality................ 116
Images
AF point display ....................... 294
Auto playback .......................... 312
Auto rotation ............................ 325
Erasing..................................... 322
Highlight alert........................... 294
Index
Histogram display .....................295
Index.........................................296
Jump display
(image browsing) ......................297
Magnification ............................298
Manual rotation.........................301
Numbering ................................151
Playback ...................................289
Protecting .................................320
Ratings .....................................302
Shooting information.................292
Slide show ................................312
Viewing on a TV set..........306, 316
Index display .................................296
INFO. button .........218, 258, 290, 394
IPB ................................................265
ISO speed .....................120, 254, 257
Automatic setting (Auto) ...........122
Automatic setting range............124
ISO expansion ..........................123
Manual setting range ................123
Minimum shutter speed ............125
Setting increments....................365
J
LCD panel ...................................... 22
Lens.......................................... 25, 40
Chromatic aberration
correction ................................. 147
Image stabilizer.......................... 43
Lock release............................... 41
Peripheral illumination
correction ................................. 146
Lens hood....................................... 42
Lighting/scene-based shots............ 96
Live View shooting ................. 76, 215
Aspect ratio .............................. 229
Exposure simulation................. 230
Face+Tracking ......................... 233
FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 236
FlexiZone - Single .................... 238
Grid display .............................. 229
Information display................... 218
Metering timer .......................... 232
Possible shots.......................... 217
Quick Control ........................... 223
Quick mode.............................. 243
Single shooting ........................ 231
LOCK.............................................. 48
JPEG.............................................116
Long exposure noise reduction .... 143
Jump display .................................297
Long exposures............................ 171
L
M
Landscape ......................................83
M (Manual exposure) ........... 164, 256
Language ........................................39
Macro photography ........................ 84
Large
(image-recording quality) ......117, 333
Magnification ........................ 247, 298
LCD monitor..............................19, 34
Brightness adjustment ..............324
Electronic level ...........................65
Image playback ........................289
Menu display ......................52, 408
Shooting function settings ..49, 395
Vari-Angle .............................34, 76
Malfunction ................................... 418
Main Dial ........................................ 46
Manual exposure.................. 164, 256
Manual focusing (MF)........... 110, 247
Manual reset................................. 152
Manual selection (AF) .................. 105
463
Index
Maximum burst .....................117, 119
Medium
(image-recording quality) ......117, 333
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu...............................................52
My Menu...................................389
Setting procedure .......................53
Settings ....................................408
3 icon .........................................8
Metering mode..............................165
Metering timer...............................232
Microadjustment ...........................377
Microphone ...........................252, 269
Miniature effect .....................227, 337
Mirror lockup .................................182
Mode Dial..................................24, 46
Monochrome images ......92, 127, 131
Movies ..........................................251
AE lock .....................................253
AF method........................263, 273
Attenuator.................................268
Autoexposure shooting.............252
Compression method ...............265
Drop frame ...............................272
Editing ......................................310
External microphone ................269
File size ....................................266
Frame rate................................265
Grid display ..............................276
Information display ...................258
Manual exposure shooting .......256
Metering timer ..........................275
Microphone.......................252, 269
Movie digital zoom....................267
Movie recording size ................265
Playback...........................306, 308
Quick Control............................264
Recording time .........................266
464
Silent shooting ......................... 275
Sound recording ...................... 268
Still photo shooting................... 261
Time code ................................ 270
Video snapshot album ............. 277
Video snapshots ...................... 277
Viewing on a TV set ......... 306, 316
Wind filter................................. 268
M-RAW (Medium RAW) ....... 117, 118
Multi Shot Noise Reduction.......... 141
Multi-controller................................ 48
Multi function lock........................... 48
Multiple exposures ....................... 175
My Menu ...................................... 389
N
Night Portrait .................................. 86
Night scenes ............................ 86, 87
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ....................... 141
Long exposures ....................... 143
Nomenclature................................. 20
Non-Canon flash units.................. 194
Normal
(image-recording quality) ..... 117, 118
NTSC ................................... 265, 413
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) .......... 101
P
P (Program AE)............................ 158
PAL....................................... 265, 413
Partial metering ............................ 166
Peripheral illumination correction . 146
Personal white balance ................ 136
Photobook set-up ......................... 359
PictBridge..................................... 345
Index
Picture Style..................126, 129, 132
Recharging ..................................... 28
Pixels ............................................116
Recording level............................. 268
Playback .......................................289
Red-eye reduction ........................ 190
Portrait ............................................82
Reduced display........................... 296
Possible shots.........................36, 217
Release shutter without card.......... 32
Power
Auto power off ............................59
Battery check......................36, 396
Battery information ...................396
Household power......................400
Possible shots ....................36, 217
Recharge performance.............396
Recharging .................................28
Pressing completely........................45
Remote control shooting .............. 184
Pressing halfway.............................45
Printing..........................................345
Cropping ...................................353
Page Layout .............................349
Paper settings...........................349
Photobook set-up .....................359
Print order (DPOF) ...................355
Printing effects ..........................350
Tilt correction ............................353
Program AE ..................................158
Program shift ............................159
Protecting images .........................320
Q
Q (Quick
Control) .............50, 90, 223, 264, 304
Quick Control Dial ...........................47
Quick mode...................................243
R
Rating mark...................................302
RAW......................................117, 118
RAW image processing ................328
RAW+JPEG ..................................116
Remote switch.............................. 184
Resizing........................................ 333
Rotation (image)........... 301, 325, 353
S
Safety shift.................................... 367
Safety warnings............................ 445
Saturation ..................................... 130
Scene icons.......................... 220, 255
Scene Intelligent Auto .................... 72
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Second-curtain synchronization ... 200
Self-timer .............................. 113, 185
Sensor cleaning............................ 339
Sepia (monochrome).............. 92, 131
Sharpness .................................... 130
Shooting function settings ...... 49, 395
Shooting information display ........ 292
Shooting modes ............................. 24
Av (Aperture-priority AE) .......... 162
B (Bulb) .................................... 171
C (Custom shooting) ................ 390
M (Manual exposure) ............... 164
P (Program AE)........................ 158
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ............ 160
A (Scene Intelligent Auto)....... 72
7 (Flash Off) ............................ 77
C (Creative Auto)..................... 78
SCN (Special scene).................. 81
2 (Portrait) ............................. 82
3 (Landscape) ...................... 83
465
Index
4 (Close-up)...........................84
5 (Sports)..............................85
6 (Night Portrait) ....................86
F (Handheld Night Scene) .....87
G (HDR Backlight Control).....88
Shooting orientation registration ...373
Shutter button .................................45
Shutter synchronization ................200
Shutter-priority AE ........................160
Silent shooting ........................80, 111
Continuous shooting...........80, 111
Silent LV shooting.....................231
Single shooting.........................111
Single-image display.....................290
Single-point AF .............................103
Slide show ....................................312
Small
(image-recording quality) ......117, 333
Soft focus..............................226, 336
Software........................................457
Speaker.........................................308
Touch screen.......................... 54, 299
Touch Shutter ............................... 245
Toy camera effect ................. 227, 337
Tripod socket.................................. 21
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ................ 160
U
USB (DIGITAL) terminal ....... 346, 455
V
Vari-Angle LCD monitor ........... 34, 76
Video snapshot album.................. 277
Video snapshots........................... 277
Video system................ 265, 319, 413
Viewfinder ...................................... 23
Dioptric adjustment .................... 44
Electronic level................... 65, 388
Grid display................................ 64
Viewing on a TV set ............. 306, 316
Volume (movie playback) ............. 309
W
Special scene mode........................81
Warning icon ................................ 376
Sports..............................................85
Water painting effect ............ 226, 337
Spot metering................................166
White balance (WB) ..................... 134
Bracketing................................ 139
Color temperature setting ........ 137
Correction ................................ 138
Custom .................................... 135
Personal................................... 136
Wi-Fi............................................. 413
S-RAW (Small RAW) ............117, 118
sRGB ............................................155
Strap ...............................................27
System map..................................416
T
Tap ..................................................54
Wind filter ..................................... 268
Temperature warning ............249, 287
Wireless flash shooting ................ 203
Time code .....................................270
Time zone .......................................37
Toning effect (monochrome) .........131
Touch beeping ................................55
466
Z
Zone AF ....................................... 103
467
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
PO Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The lenses and accessories mentioned in this Instruction Manual are current as of
April 2013. For information on the camera’s compatibility with any lenses and
accessories introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center.
CEL-SU5SA210
© CANON INC. 2013
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising